JP2015084929A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a technique that is able to reduce execution of an erroneous performance that does not correspond to the game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: a main control device that controls the procedure of a game; and a performance control device that controls the content of a performance on the basis of information notified from the main control device. When a procedure momentum, which changes a degree of procedure of a game under control by the main control device, arises, performance control means is simultaneously informed of a command corresponding to the procedure momentum that has arisen as information notified to the performance control device, and machine type information (machine type command) indicating which one of machine types of different game procedure contents corresponds to this game machine.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine that, when a lottery opportunity occurs during a game, displays a symbol in a manner that displays a result of a lottery after a symbol change display.

  Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for the occurrence of a power-off state in which sudden power supply stops, the current gaming state and gaming situation are stored and backed up, and the backup information is read when power is restored to play the game Has resumed. In addition, there is a gaming machine in which display contents and effects corresponding to the models are provided by changing the game contents for each model of the gaming machine, and effects of all models are stored in the effect control device. (For example, Patent Document 1)

JP 2010-099282 A

  In the prior art described above, the model information of the gaming machine currently in use is transmitted to the effect control device at the start of the change of the special symbol, thereby suppressing damage caused by the unknown model information. However, since the model information is transmitted only at a specific timing such as at the start of fluctuation, there is a possibility that it is not possible to immediately return the effect when the power is cut off at other timing. Also, if the model information is changed unintentionally due to noise during the game, the model information is transmitted only at a specific timing (at the start of fluctuation), so the model that is wrong as an effect that starts after an unintended change There was a risk of performing an effect that applied the information.

  Therefore, the present invention provides a technique that can reduce the execution of an erroneous performance.

The present invention employs the following means for solving the above problems. In addition, the wording in the following brackets is an illustration to the last, and this invention is not limited to this.
Solution 1: The gaming machine of the present solution controls the progress of the game based on predetermined game progress (game specifications corresponding to the model to which the present game machine corresponds among the types of game machines). A main control device that controls the content of the effect based on notification of information (various commands) from the main control device, and changes in the degree of progress of the game on the control by the main control device When a progress opportunity occurs, the trigger information generation means for generating the trigger information (corresponding command) related to the progress trigger generated as information to be notified to the effect control device, and a plurality of types of models with different progress contents of the game Model information generation means for generating model information (model code designation command) indicating which model the main control device supports, and control by the main control device When the serial progression trigger occurs, a gaming machine and an information transmitting unit that notifies the presentation control means adds the model information in the trigger information.

In the gaming machine of this solution, for example, the game proceeds in the following flow.
(1) The progress of the game is controlled by the main controller. The main control device is a device that is the center of the control operation, and controls the overall operation of the gaming machine.
(2) The content of the effect is controlled by the effect control device based on the notification of the information (command) from the main control device in (1) above. The effect control device is a device that controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the gaming machine, and takes charge of the control regarding the contents of the effect.

(3) In the information (command) notified from the main control device in (2) above, an event that affects the progress of the game occurs in the game controlled by the main control device, and the game changes due to the event. In doing so, information (command) related to the event is generated, and the generated information (command) is notified to the effect control device. Then, in response to the change in the progress of the game occurring in the effect control device, the effect corresponding to the change is executed.
(4) As other information (command) from the main control device of (1), information (model code designation command) indicating the model of the gaming machine is also generated. Here, the information indicating the model (model code designation command) is information used when an effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is selected in the effect control device.

(5) Information (model code designation command) indicating the model of this gaming machine in (4) above when transmitting information (command) on an event that causes a change in the progress of the game in (3) above Are transmitted at the same time (simultaneously or continuously).

  Thus, at the timing when information (command) is transmitted from the main control device to the effect control device, information (command) indicating the corresponding model of the main control device is also transmitted at the same time. The device can always check the model corresponding to the currently operating gaming machine, and can reduce the execution of an erroneous presentation corresponding to another model. In addition, when the production control device is reset due to a power failure, noise, control error, hardware configuration error, etc., information related to the model (model code designation command) is included in the information (command) transmitted from the main control device. Therefore, an effect corresponding to the model of this gaming machine can be executed immediately.

  Solution 2: The gaming machine of the present invention is the solution 1, in which power supply control means connected to an external power supply for supplying driving power, progress information relating to the progress of the game currently being performed, and the power supply Even when a power-off state in which the supply of drive power by the control means is cut off occurs, the progress information holding means for holding the stored progress information and the supply of drive power by the power supply control means are resumed and When the power-off state is resolved, game content return means for executing a return operation for returning the progress of the game based on the progress information stored in the progress information holding means, and the effect control device are provided. When new information is notified by the information transmitting means after the return operation by the game content returning means is completed, the previous information based on the opportunity information among the notified information And an effect execution means after power interruption return for executing an effect corresponding to a model corresponding to the main control device based on the model information among the notified information and an effect corresponding to the progress opportunity. It is a gaming machine equipped.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The gaming machine of the present solving means is provided with a power supply control means that is connected to an external power supply and supplies driving power. For example, when the power control means takes in external power from the island facility through a power cord, the power can be supplied to the gaming machine. The electric power supplied by the power supply control means is distributed to each device (main control device, production control device, etc.) in the gaming machine.
(2) When a power-off state (power-off state) in which the supply of driving power is cut off according to (1) above occurs, return processing game information (backup information) required for the game content return processing is stored. The Note that the power-off state includes not only a power-off and a power outage during operation of the gaming machine but also an instantaneous power outage due to a fault such as lightning or static electricity.
(3) When the supply of drive power according to (1) above is resumed and the power-off state is resolved, that is, when the supply of power to the gaming machine is resumed, it is stored in (2) above. Based on the return process game information, a return operation (return process) for returning the game content is executed.

(4) When the return operation of the above (3) is completed and the game is restarted and any change occurs in the progress of the game, new information is notified to the effect control device. Since the new information includes information (model code designation command) indicating the model of the main control device, an effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine can be executed immediately.

  Solution 3: The gaming machine of the present invention is a return effect provided in the effect control device according to Solution 2 and indicating that the return operation is being executed while the return operation is being executed by the game content return means. When the new information is notified by the information transmitting means during execution of the return effect by the return effect executing means, the return effect executing means for executing In the main control device based on the model information among the notified information, the output corresponding to the progress opportunity based on the opportunity information among the notified information after the return effect is ended. It is a gaming machine that executes an effect corresponding to a compatible model.

The following features are added to the gaming machine of this solution.
(1) The effect control device executes a return effect indicating that the return operation is being executed during the return operation. The return effect is an effect of displaying an image such as “Please wait for a while.
(2) When a change occurs in the progress of the game during the execution of the return effect according to (1), new information is notified to the effect control device. Since the new information includes information (model code designation command) indicating the model of the main control device, after the return effect has been completed, it is possible to respond to the model of this gaming machine as soon as possible and Corresponding effects can be executed.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine according to the present invention is a model in which the main control device corresponds to the contents of the effect provided in the effect control device and controlled by the effect control device in the solution means 1 to 3. In addition, it further includes an effect data storage means for storing at least a plurality of effect data corresponding to each of the predetermined triggers, and the effect control means is different from a model supported by the main control device. When the effect data storage means stores the effect data corresponding to the model, the plurality of effect data in which the effect data corresponding to the model information notified from the main control device is stored by the effect data storage means It is a gaming machine that reads out the content and controls the contents of the performance.

  According to this solution, even if the production data corresponding to a different model from the game machine in operation is stored in the production control device, when some change occurs in the progress of the game, the main control device Since information indicating the model (model code designation command) is transmitted, an effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine can be executed.

  Solution 4: The gaming machine according to the present invention is a model in which the main control device corresponds to the contents of the effect provided in the effect control device and controlled by the effect control device in the solution means 1 to 3. In addition, it further includes an effect data storage means for storing at least a plurality of effect data corresponding to each of the predetermined triggers, and the effect control means is different from a model supported by the main control device. When the effect data storage means stores the effect data corresponding to the model, the plurality of effect data in which the effect data corresponding to the model information notified from the main control device is stored by the effect data storage means It is a gaming machine that reads out the content and controls the contents of the performance.

  According to this solution, even if the production data corresponding to a different model from the game machine in operation is stored in the production control device, when some change occurs in the progress of the game, the main control device Since information indicating the model (model code designation command) is transmitted, an effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine can be executed.

  Solution 5: The gaming machine according to the present invention includes a lottery execution unit that executes a predetermined lottery (internal lottery regarding a special symbol) when a lottery trigger occurs during the game in the solution units 1 to 4, and the predetermined lottery When executed, the symbol display means for displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol (special symbol) is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time as a trigger, and the symbol display When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by means, a special game executing means for opening a special winning opening and executing a special game (big hit game), and the special game executed by the special game executing means The round game is configured by a round game performed over a plurality of rounds, and the large winning opening is opened in a predetermined release pattern during each round game. And the information transmitting means is configured to display the symbol stop by the symbol display means at the start of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, at the start of the symbol stop display by the symbol display means. At the end of the game, at the start of execution of the special game by the special game execution means, at the end of execution of the special game by the special game execution means, at the start of execution of the round game by the round game execution means, or The game machine adds the model information to the opportunity information and notifies the effect control means that the progress opportunity has occurred at the end of execution of the round game by the game execution means.

  According to this solution, the timing at which any change occurs in the progress of the game is as follows: at the start of special symbol variation display, at the start and end of special symbol stop display, at the start of jackpot game (at the start of opening) This applies to the start and end of the big hit game round, the start and end of the big hit game end effect (ending), and the like. Since information indicating the model of the main control device (model code designation command) is transmitted at these timings, it is possible to always check the model of the gaming machine and execute an effect corresponding to the model. it can.

  According to the present invention, when notifying the information from the main control device to the effect control device, since the model information is also added and notified, execution of an erroneous effect can be reduced.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows a game board unit independently. It is a front view which expands and shows a part of game board unit. It is a block diagram which shows the various electronic devices with which the pachinko machine was equipped. It is a front view which shows the periphery of a prize port unit. It is a figure explaining behavior of a game ball in the circumference of a prize mouth unit. It is a perspective view which shows the circumference | surroundings of a winning opening unit except a part of transparent decoration member. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the variable start winning device 28 and the 1st variable winning device 30. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the variable start winning device 28 and the 1st variable winning device 30. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is a figure for demonstrating the detail of the 2nd variable prize-winning apparatus 31. FIG. It is sectional drawing which shows the opening part periphery provided in the upstream of the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a figure for demonstrating behavior of the game ball which flows into the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a figure for demonstrating behavior of the game ball which flows into the collection | recovery channel | path 31c. It is a perspective view which shows the periphery of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a disassembled perspective view explaining the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t. It is a flowchart (1/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart (2/2) which shows the example of a procedure of a reset start process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a power-off occurrence check process concretely. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an interruption management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a switch input event process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 1st special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a 2nd special symbol memory update process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production | presentation determination process at the time of acquisition. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a special symbol game process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol change pre-processing. It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of a loss (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the fluctuation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows the structure row | line | column of the 1st special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows the structure column of the 2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability non-time shortening state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state). It is a figure which shows an example of the big hit hour fluctuation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special symbol memory | storage area shift process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the special symbol stop display process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a display output management process. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a big win time variable winning apparatus management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening big opening / closing operation | movement process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning prize closing opening process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of the variable winning device management process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening pattern setting process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening opening / closing operation | movement process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the big winning opening closing process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the end process at the time of a small hit. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a subcommand transmission process. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific transmission timing which transmits a model code designation | designated command. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a model command designation | designated command generation process. It is a figure which shows an example of the preceding value of a model command designation | designated command. It is a figure which shows an example of the subsequent value of a model command designation | designated command. It is a figure explaining the game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1. FIG. It is a continuation figure showing an example of a production picture corresponding to change display and stop display of a special symbol. It is a continuous figure which shows the flow of the reach production performed at the time of big hit (winning) at the time of corresponding to "10 round normal symbol" etc. FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (1/9). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the effect of a big role effect that is executed when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol” or the like (2/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (3/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (4/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (5/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (6/9). It is a continuation figure which shows partially the example of the production of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (7/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (8/9). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the production | presentation of the big role production performed when it corresponds to "10 round normal symbol" etc. (9/9). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect of fireworks rush. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of a mistake (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time of losing (2/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in a fireworks rush or the time (3/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the presentation performed at the time of winning in the fireworks rush or the time off (4/4). FIG. 10 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big role production performed during a big hit game in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st special special festival bonus production partially (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows an example of the 1st special special festival bonus production partially (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st special special festival bonus production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st special special festival bonus production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 1st special special festival bonus production partially (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 2nd special special festival bonus production partially (1/4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 2nd special special festival bonus production partially (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 2nd special special festival bonus production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 2nd special special festival bonus production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows an example of the 3rd special special festival bonus production partially (1/5). It is a continuation figure which shows an example of the 3rd special special festival bonus production partially (2/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of the 3rd special special festival bonus production partially (3/5). It is a continuation figure which shows an example of the 3rd special special festival bonus production partially (4/5). It is a continuation figure which shows an example of the 3rd special special festival bonus production partially (5/5). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of a production of coast mode. It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 1) (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 1) (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 3). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 4). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of presentation when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 5) (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 5) (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of presentation when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 6) (1/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of power failure occurs during a game (the 6) (2/2). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of production when the state of a power failure occurs during a game (the 7). It is a continuation figure which shows the example of an effect when the state of power failure occurs during a game (the 8). It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the production management process during a power-off reset. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an operation | movement memory production | presentation management process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of effect design management processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of an effect design change pre-process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a big hit hour variation production pattern selection process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of the fluctuation | variation effect pattern selection process at the time of loss. It is a flowchart which shows the structural example of a process at the time of variable winning apparatus operation | movement. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a variable winning apparatus operation | movement pre-processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a normal jackpot production | presentation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of special jackpot presentation setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special special festival bonus production setting process. It is a figure which shows an example of a special special festival bonus production selection table. It is a flowchart which shows the example of a procedure of a special special festival bonus production management process.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter abbreviated as “pachinko machine”) 1. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 uses a game ball as a game medium, and a player borrows a game ball from a game hall operator to play a game with the pachinko machine 1. In the game of the pachinko machine 1, each game ball is a medium having a game value, and a privilege (profit) that the player enjoys as a result of the game is, for example, a game ball acquired by the player Based on the number of games, it can be converted into a game value. Hereinafter, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2.

〔overall structure〕
The pachinko machine 1 mainly includes an outer frame unit 2, an integrated door unit 4, and an inner frame assembly 7 (a plastic frame, a gaming machine frame) as its main body. The integrated door unit 4 is located on the foremost side when viewed from the front facing the player. An inner frame assembly 7 is located on the back side (back side) of the integrated door unit 4, and the outer frame unit 2 is disposed so as to surround the outer side of the inner frame assembly 7.

  The outer frame unit 2 is a structure in which wood and metal materials are combined in a vertically long rectangular shape. The outer frame unit 2 has a fastener such as a screw attached to an island facility (not shown) in the game hall. It is used and fixed. In the vertically long rectangular outer frame unit 2, wood is used for a portion corresponding to the upper and lower short sides, and a metal material is used for a portion corresponding to the left and right long sides.

  The integrated door unit 4 has a structure in which the tray unit 6 is integrated at a lower position thereof. The integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are attached to the island facility via the outer frame unit 2, and these operate in an openable manner via a hinge mechanism (not shown). An opening / closing axis of a hinge mechanism (not shown) extends in the vertical direction along the left end as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1.

  A unified lock unit 9 is provided on the inner side of the right edge (the left edge in FIG. 2) of the inner frame assembly 7 when viewed from the front in FIG. Correspondingly, a locking tool (not shown) is also provided on the right side edge (back side) of the integrated door unit 4 and the outer frame unit 2. As shown in FIG. 1, in the state where the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly 7 are closed with respect to the outer frame unit 2, the unified lock unit 9 on the back side of the integrated door unit 4 and the inner frame assembly together with the locking device. 7 cannot be opened.

  A cylinder lock 6 a with a key hole is provided on the right edge of the tray unit 6. For example, when an administrator of the game hall inserts a dedicated key into the keyhole and twists the cylinder lock 6a clockwise, the unified lock unit 9 operates and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened together with the inner frame assembly 7. . If these are opened from the outer frame unit 2 to the front side (moved like a door), the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is exposed on the front side.

  On the other hand, when the cylinder lock 6a is twisted counterclockwise, only the locking of the integrated door unit 4 is released while the inner frame assembly 7 remains locked, and the integrated door unit 4 can be opened. When the integrated door unit 4 is opened to the front side, the game board unit 8 is directly exposed, and in this state, the manager of the game hall can remove obstacles such as ball clogging in the board surface. Further, when the integrated door unit 4 is opened, the tray unit 6 is also opened to the front side together.

  The pachinko machine 1 includes the game board unit 8 described above as a game unit. The game board unit 8 is supported by the inner frame assembly 7 behind (inside) the integrated door unit 4. The game board unit 8 can be attached to and detached from the inner frame assembly 7 with the integrated door unit 4 opened to the front side, for example. The integrated door unit 4 is formed with a vertically oval window 4a at the center thereof, and a glass unit (no reference numeral) is attached in the window 4a. The glass unit is a combination of, for example, two transparent plates (glass plates) cut in accordance with the shape of the window 4a. The glass unit is attached to the back side of the integrated door unit 4 via a fixture (not shown). A game area 8a (board surface, game board) is formed on the front surface of the game board unit 8, and this game area 8a is visible to the player from the front side through the window 4a. When the integrated door unit 4 is closed, a space in which a game ball can flow down is formed between the inner surface of the glass unit and the board surface.

  The saucer unit 6 has a shape protruding from the integrated door unit 4 to the front side as a whole, and an upper plate 6b is formed on the upper surface thereof. The upper plate 6b can store a game ball (rental ball) lent to a player and a game ball (prize ball) acquired by winning a prize. In the tray unit 6, a lower plate 6c is formed at a lower position of the upper plate 6b. The lower tray 6c stores game balls that are further paid out when the upper tray 6b is full. The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a so-called CR machine (model connected to the CR unit), and the game balls borrowed by the player are separated from the payout unit 172 on the back side separately from the prize balls. It is paid out to the dish 6b or the lower dish 6c).

  A lending operation unit 14 is provided on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, and a ball lending button 10 and a return button 12 are arranged on the lending operation unit 14. When a player operates the ball lending button 10 with a valuable medium (for example, a magnetic recording medium, a storage IC built-in medium, etc.) inserted in a CR unit (not shown), the number corresponding to a predetermined frequency unit (for example, 5 degrees). (For example, 125) game balls are lent out. For this reason, a frequency display unit (not shown) is arranged on the upper surface of the lending operation unit 14, and the remaining frequency of the valuable medium put in the CR unit is displayed on this frequency display unit. The player can receive the return of the valuable medium with the remaining frequency by operating the return button 12. Although the CR machine is taken as an example in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 may be a cash machine (a model not connected to the CR unit) different from the CR machine.

  Further, on the upper surface of the tray unit 6, an upper dish ball removal button 6d is provided in front of the upper dish 6b in the upper position, and a lower dish ball removal lever 6e is provided in the center of the lower dish 6c. Is installed. The player can cause the game balls stored in the upper plate 6b to flow down to the lower plate 6c by, for example, pressing the upper plate ball removing button 6d. Also, the player can drop the game balls stored in the lower plate 6c downward and discharge them by sliding the lower plate ball removal lever 6e to the left, for example. The discharged game ball is received by, for example, a ball receiving box (not shown).

  A handle unit 16 is installed on the lower right side of the tray unit 6. The player operates the handle unit 16 to operate the launch control board set 174 and can launch (shoot) a game ball toward the game area 8a (ball launcher). The launched game ball rises from the lower edge portion of the game board unit 8 along the left edge portion, is guided by an outer band (not shown), and is thrown into the game area 8a. A large number of obstacle nails, windmills (without reference numerals in the drawing) and the like are arranged in the game area 8a, and the thrown-in game balls flow down in the game area 8a while being guided and guided by the obstacle nails and the windmill. The configuration of the game area 8a (board surface, game board) will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

[Configuration of the front of the frame]
The integrated door unit 4 is provided with a left top lens unit 47 and an upper right illumination unit 49 as components for production. Among these, the left top lens unit 47 incorporates a glass frame top lamp 46 and a left glass frame decoration lamp 48, and the upper right electrical decoration unit 49 incorporates a right glass frame decoration lamp 50. In addition, left and right glass frame decoration lamps 52 are installed in the integrated door unit 4 so as to be connected to the lower part of the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. It extends from the left and right edges of the integrated door unit 4 to the front surface of the tray unit 6. In the integrated door unit 4, the glass frame top lamp 46 and the left and right glass frame decoration lamps 48, 50, and 52 are arranged so as to surround the glass unit.

  The various lamps 46, 48, 50, and 52 described above perform effects by, for example, the light emission of the built-in LEDs (lighting and blinking, change in luminance gradation, change in color tone, etc.). In addition, on the upper part of the integrated door unit 4, speakers on the glass frame 54 and 55 are incorporated in the left top lens unit 47 and the upper right illumination unit 49, respectively. On the other hand, an outer frame speaker 56 is incorporated in the lower left position of the outer frame unit 2. These speakers 54, 55, and 56 output sound effects, BGM, voice, etc. (sound in general) and execute effects.

  In addition, an effect switching button 45 is installed in the center of the tray unit 6 at a position in front of the upper plate 6b. The effect switching button 45 has, for example, a combination of a push-type circular button and a rotary jog ring (jog dial) around it. The player switches the contents of the effect (for example, the background screen displayed on the liquid crystal display 42) by pushing or rotating the effect switching button 45, or during the change of the symbol, the display of the big hit, or the like During the big hit game, some kind of effect (notice effect, probability change promotion effect, promotion effect while playing a big role, etc.) can be generated.

[Configuration on the back side]
As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, there are a power supply control unit 162, a main control board unit 170, a dispensing device unit 172, a flow path unit 173, a launch control board set 174, and a dispensing control board unit 176. A back cover unit 178 and the like are installed. In addition, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, various electronic devices (including a control computer not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the pachinko machine 1, an external terminal board 160, a power cord (power plug) 164, A ground wire (ground terminal) 166, connection wiring (not shown), and the like are installed.

  The payout device unit 172 includes, for example, a prize ball tank 172a and a prize ball case (no reference symbol), and the prize ball tank 172a is installed on the upper edge (back side) of the inner frame assembly 7. In this state, game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown) can be stored. The game balls stored in the prize ball tank 172a are guided to a prize ball case through an upper prize ball basket (not shown). The flow path unit 173 guides the game ball sent out from the payout unit 172 toward the tray unit 6 on the front side.

  The external terminal board 160 is used for connecting the pachinko machine 1 to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.). Various external information signals (for example, award ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start opening information, etc.) indicating the progress state and maintenance state are output to an external electronic device. ing.

  The power cord 164 secures a power source (electric power) necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 1 by being connected to, for example, a power source device (for example, AC 24V) installed in an island facility of a game arcade. In addition, the ground wire 166 is connected to a ground terminal that is also installed in the island facility, thereby securing the ground (ground) of the pachinko machine 1.

  FIG. 3 is a front view showing the game board unit 8 alone. The game board unit 8 includes a game board 8b serving as a base, and a game area 8a is formed on the front side of the game board 8b. The game board 8b is made of, for example, a transparent resin plate. With the game board unit 8 fixed to the inner frame assembly 7, the front surface of the game board 8b is parallel to the glass unit. On the front surface of the game board 8b, the above-described game area 8a is formed inside a launch rail (not indicated by reference numeral) installed in a substantially circular shape.

  In the game area 8a, a relatively large effect unit 40 is arranged at the center position, and the game area 8a is largely divided into a left part, a right part and a lower part with the effect unit 40 as the center. The left part of the game area 8a is a first game area (left-handed area) used in a normal game state (low probability non-time shortened state), and the right part of the game area 8a is an advantageous game state (big hit game state) , A second game area (right-handed area) used in a small hit game state, a low probability time shortened state, a high probability time shortened state, and the like. Further, in the game area 8a, a middle start winning opening 26, a starting gate 20, a normal winning opening 22, 24, a variable starting winning apparatus 28, a first variable winning apparatus 30, and a second variable winning apparatus are provided around the effect unit 40. 31 etc. are distributed and installed.

  Among these, the middle start winning opening 26 is arranged at the center of the lower portion of the game area 8a, and the start gate 20, the second variable winning apparatus 31, the first variable winning apparatus 30, and the variable start winning apparatus 28 are arranged in the gaming area. They are arranged in this order from the top on the right side of 8a. Further, the three left normal winning holes 22 are arranged in the left part of the game area 8a, and the one right normal winning hole 24 is arranged in the right part of the game area 8a. The variable start winning device 28 is decorated with “1st” decoration, the first variable winning device 30 is decorated with “2nd” decoration, and the second variable winning device 31 has The surrounding area is decorated with “3rd”.

  The game ball thrown into the game area 8a passes through the start gate 20 in the process of flowing down, enters the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, or variable start at the time of operation. The player enters the winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation. Here, there is a possibility that game balls flowing down the left area of the game area 8 a mainly enter the middle start winning opening 26 or enter the normal winning opening 22. On the other hand, the game balls flowing down the right area of the game area 8a mainly pass through the start gate 20, enter the variable start winning device 28 during operation, or enter the first variable winning device 30 during opening operation. There is a possibility that the player enters a ball, enters the second variable winning device 31 during the opening operation, or enters the normal winning port 24.

  The game balls that have passed through the start gate 20 continue to flow down in the game area 8a, but the medium start winning port 26, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device. The game balls that have entered the device 31 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 through through holes formed in the game board (plywood material, transparent board, etc. constituting the game board unit 8).

  Of these, the game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8 after passing through the transparent collection passage 30c, and the game balls that have entered the second variable winning device 31 are Then, after passing through the transparent collection passage 31c, it is collected to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  Here, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the game area 8a (the board surface), when a game ball is to enter the middle start winning opening 26 or the normal winning opening 22, an area on the left side in the game area 8a (left-handed) It is necessary to drive a game ball into the area (so-called “left-handed” is executed).

  On the other hand, when a game ball is to be placed in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, or the normal winning port 24, the right side region (right-handed region) in the game region 8a. ) To play a game ball (perform so-called “right-handed”).

  The variable start winning device 28 operates when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied (when a normal symbol is stopped and displayed for a predetermined stop display time in a winning manner), and accordingly, a right start winning port ( Enables entry into (without reference sign) (ordinary electric accessory). The variable start winning device 28 has, for example, one open / close member 28b, and this open / close member 28b reciprocates in the left-right direction along the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. That is, as shown by a dotted line in FIG. 3, one open / close member 28b is in the closed position (closed position) with the tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the right start winning opening (game) (There is no gap where the ball can enter). On the other hand, when the variable start winning device 28 is operated, the opening / closing member 28b is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the right opening winning opening is opened by expanding the opening width on the right side. During this time, the variable start winning device 28 is in a state in which a game ball can enter, and can enter the right start winning opening (variable start winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 28b also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the right start winning opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the variable start winning device 28 (the right start winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port) during the opening operation, but the balls are generated randomly.

  The first variable winning device 30 described above is a predetermined first condition (from the first round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode other than non-winning). It operates when the condition of the 10th round) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the first grand prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, first special prize event generating means).

  The first variable winning device 30 is a device disposed above the variable start winning device 28 and has, for example, one opening / closing member 30a. The opening / closing member 30a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one opening / closing member 30a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the first big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the first variable winning device 30 is operated, the opening / closing member 30a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position to the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the first big prize opening. During this time, the first variable winning device 30 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the first big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 30a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the first grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the first variable winning device 30 (the first big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the first variable prize-winning device 30 during the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  The second variable winning device 31 described above has a predetermined second condition (the 16th round from the 11th round of the jackpot game) when the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a winning manner). It is activated when the condition (eye condition) is satisfied, and allows the player to enter the second big prize opening (no reference sign) (special electric accessory, second special prize event generating means).

  The second variable winning device 31 is a device arranged above the first variable winning device 30, and has, for example, one opening / closing member 31a. The opening / closing member 31a reciprocates in the left-right direction with respect to the board surface by the action of a link mechanism using a solenoid (not shown), for example. As shown in the drawing, one open / close member 31a is in a closed position (closed position) with its tip facing upward, and at this time, it is impossible to enter the second big prize opening (there is no gap for a game ball to enter). State). On the other hand, when the second variable winning device 31 is operated, the opening / closing member 31a is displaced (expanded) from the closed position toward the open position, and the opening width is enlarged on the right side to open the second big prize opening. During this time, the second variable winning device 31 is in a state in which a game ball can be entered, and can enter the second big winning opening (variable winning means). At this time, the opening / closing member 31a also functions as a member that guides the entry of the game ball into the second grand prize opening. In addition, the arrangement of the obstacle nails installed in the game board unit 8 is basically an aspect that does not extremely impede the flow of the game ball toward the second variable winning device 31 (the second big winning opening at the time of opening). However, the game ball does not necessarily enter the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the opening operation, and the ball is generated randomly.

  In the game board unit 8, the effect unit 40 is installed from the center position to the right side portion. The production unit 40 has an upper edge portion 40a that functions as a guide member that changes the flow direction of the game ball, and includes various decorative parts 40b and 40c on the inside thereof. The decorative parts 40b and 40c can enhance the decorativeness of the game board unit 8 by three-dimensional modeling, and can perform a stunning operation by emitting transmitted light from, for example, a built-in light emitter (LED or the like). . In addition, a liquid crystal display 42 (image display) is installed inside the effect unit 40, and various effect images are displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, including effect symbols corresponding to special symbols. . In this way, the game board unit 8 impresses the player with the characteristics of the pachinko machine 1 based on the configuration of the board surface and the decorativeness of the effect unit 40. Further, when the game board 8b is a transparent resin board (for example, an acrylic board) as in the present embodiment, various decorative bodies (including a movable body and a light emitting body) arranged not only on the front side but also behind the game board 8b. ) Can be added.

  In addition, a drive source (for example, a motor, a solenoid, or the like) is attached to the interior of the effect unit 40 together with a movable body 40f for effect (for example, a decorative object having a logo type portion reminiscent of the pachinko machine 1). The effect movable body 40f can execute an effect accompanied by an operation of a tangible object in addition to an effect using an image by the liquid crystal display 42 and an effect by a light emitter. Due to the effects using these movable bodies 40f, appealing power different from the effects using two-dimensional images can be exhibited.

  In addition, a ball guide passage 40d is formed at the left edge of the effect unit 40, and a rolling stage 40e is formed at the lower edge thereof. The ball guide passage 40d is opened obliquely upward to the left in the game area 8a. When a game ball flowing down in the game area 8a randomly flows into the ball guide path 40d, it passes through the inside and rolls. Released onto the stage 40e. The upper surface of the rolling stage 40e has a smooth curved surface. Here, the game ball can roll in the left-right direction. The game ball that has rolled on the rolling stage 40e will eventually flow into the lower game area 8a. A ball discharge path 40k is formed at the center position of the rolling stage 40e, and the game ball guided from the rolling stage 40e to the ball discharge path 40k easily flows into the middle start winning opening 26 just below the ball discharge path 40k. .

  In addition, an out port 32 is formed in the game area 8 a, and game balls that have not entered (winned) in various winning ports are finally collected through the out port 32 to the back side of the game board unit 8. Also, the normal winning ports 22, 24, the middle starting winning port 26, the variable starting winning device 28 (right starting winning port), the first variable winning device 30 (first big winning port), and the second variable winning device 31 (second All game balls that have been driven into the game area 8a, including the game balls that have entered the big prize opening), are collected to the back side of the game board unit 8. The collected game balls are discharged out of the frame from the back side of the pachinko machine 1 through an out passage assembly (not shown), and further join a supply path of an island facility (not shown).

  FIG. 4 is an enlarged front view showing a part of the game board unit 8 (lower left position in the window 4a). That is, the game board unit 8 is provided with a normal symbol display device 33 and a normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a at the lower left position in the window 4a, for example, as well as a first special symbol display device 34 and a second special symbol display device 35. And a game state display device 38 is provided. Among these, the normal symbol display device 33, for example, turns on two lamps (LEDs) alternately to display the normal symbols variably, and stops and displays the normal symbols when the lamps are turned on or off. The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a displays 0 to 4 memory numbers depending on, for example, a combination of turning off, lighting, or blinking of two lamps (LEDs). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed. Here, although two lamps (LEDs) are used here, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a may be configured using four lamps (LEDs). In this case, the number of working memories can be displayed by the number of lamps to be lit.

  The normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a changes to the display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of memorizing the occurrence of an operation lottery trigger each time a game ball passes through the start gate 20. Then, every time a change of the normal symbol is started with the passage (up to 4) as a trigger, the display mode is changed by one by one. In this embodiment, when the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the game ball passes through the start gate 20 in a state in which the normal symbol can already start to change (during stop display). However, the display mode does not change. That is, the memorized number (maximum 4) represented by the display mode of the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a represents the number of passages at which the variation of the normal symbol has not started yet.

  In addition, the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 display, for example, a change state and a stopped state of the corresponding first special symbol or second special symbol by 7 segment LED (with dots), respectively. (Symbol display means). The first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35 may have a form in which a plurality of dot LEDs are arranged geometrically (for example, in a circular shape).

  Further, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a have 0 to 4 each, for example, depending on a display mode constituted by a combination of extinction or lighting and blinking of two lamps (LEDs). Is stored (memory number display means). For example, in a display mode in which both lamps are extinguished, a memory number of 0 is displayed, in a display mode in which one lamp is lit, a memory number of 1 is displayed, and in a display mode in which the same one lamp is blinked. In the display mode in which two stored numbers are displayed, and in addition to blinking one lamp, the other lamp is lit, three stored numbers are displayed, and in the display mode in which the two lamps are flashed together, the stored number is four. For example, the individual is displayed.

  The first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is a display mode after being incremented one by one in the sense of storing that a game ball has entered the middle start winning port 26 every time a game ball flows into the middle start winning port 26. Each time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry of the ball, the display mode is decreased by one each time. The second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is incremented by one in the sense that each time a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28, it stores that the game ball has entered the right start winning port. It changes to the display mode (up to a maximum of 4), and changes to the display mode after being reduced one by one every time the change of the special symbol is started with the entry. In the present embodiment, when the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), the middle start winning opening 26 is in a state where the first special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if a game ball enters, the display mode does not change. In addition, when the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is not lit (the number of memories is 0), a game ball enters the variable start winning device 28 in a state where the second special symbol can already start to change (when stopped). Even if it is a sphere, the display mode does not change. That is, the number of memories (maximum of 4) represented by the display mode of each special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, 35a is the number of incoming balls for which the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol has not yet started. It represents the number of times.

  The game state display device 38 includes a plurality of LEDs corresponding to, for example, jackpot type display lamps 38a and 38b, a probability variation state display lamp 38d, a short time state display lamp 38e, and a launch position designation lamp 38f. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol are described. The symbol operation memory lamp 35a and the game state display device 38 are attached to the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89.

[Control configuration]
Next, a configuration related to control of the pachinko machine 1 will be described. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing various electronic devices equipped in the pachinko machine 1. The pachinko machine 1 includes a main control device 70 (main control computer) that serves as the center of the control operation. The main control device 70 mainly has a function of controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. Yes. The main controller 70 is built in the main control board unit 170 described above.

  The main controller 70 is equipped with a circuit board (main control board) on which a main control CPU 72 as a central processing unit is mounted. The main control CPU 72 includes a ROM 74, a RAM ( RWM) 76 and other semiconductor memories are integrated as an LSI. The main controller 70 is equipped with a random number generator 75 and a sampling circuit 77. Among these, the random number generator 75 generates a hardware random number (for example, 0 to 65535 in decimal notation) for the big symbol determination of the special symbol lottery or the normal symbol lottery, and the random number generated here is generated. Is input to the main control CPU 72 through the sampling circuit 77. In addition, the main controller 70 is equipped with peripheral ICs such as an input / output (I / O) port 79, a clock generation circuit (not shown), a counter / timer circuit (CTC), etc., and these are circuited together with the main control CPU 72. It is mounted on the board. A signal transmission path, a power supply path, a control bus, and the like are formed as wiring patterns on the circuit board (or the inner layer portion).

  The start gate 20 described above is integrally provided with a gate switch 78 for detecting the passage of a game ball. In addition, the game board unit 8 includes a medium start winning port 26, a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31 corresponding to the middle start winning port switch 80 and the right start winning port, respectively. A switch 82, a first count switch 84, and a second count switch 85 are provided. The start winning port switches 80 and 82 are for detecting the entrance of a game ball into the middle start winning port 26 and the variable start winning device 28 (right start winning port). The first count switch 84 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Further, the second count switch 85 is for detecting the number of game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 (second big prize opening) and counting the number thereof. Similarly, the game board unit 8 is equipped with a prize opening switch 86 for detecting the entry of game balls into the normal prize openings 22 and 24. Here, a configuration using a common winning opening switch 86 for all the normal winning openings 22 and 24 is given as an example, but for example, separate winning opening switches 86 are installed on the left and right sides of the board, and the left winning opening switch is provided. In 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 22 located on the left side of the board, and in the right prize port switch 86, it is detected that a game ball has entered the normal winning port 24 located on the right side of the board. Also good.

  In any case, the winning detection signals of these switches 78 to 86 are input to the main control CPU 72 via an input / output driver (not shown). Note that due to the configuration of the game board unit 8, in this embodiment, the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning opening switch 86 are passed through the panel relay terminal board 87. The panel relay terminal board 87 is provided with wiring patterns, connection terminals, and the like for relaying each winning detection signal.

  The above-mentioned normal symbol display device 33, normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, first special symbol display device 34, second special symbol display device 35, first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a and game The state display device 38 is controlled in display operation based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72. The main control CPU 72 outputs control signals for the display devices 33, 34, 35, 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, 35a according to the progress of the game, and controls the lighting state of each LED. The display devices 33, 34, 35, and 38 and the lamps 33a, 34a, and 35a are installed in the game board unit 8 in a state of being mounted on one integrated display board 89 as described above. A control signal is transmitted from the main control CPU 72 to the display substrate 89 through the panel relay terminal board 87.

  In addition, the game board unit 8 includes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first large prize opening solenoid 90, and the second large corresponding to the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. A prize opening solenoid 97 is provided. These solenoids 88, 90, 97 operate (excited) based on a control signal from the main control CPU 72, and open / close operations (activate) the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31, respectively. Let Note that these solenoids 88, 90, 97 also transmit control signals from the main control CPU 72 via the panel relay terminal plate 87.

  In addition, a glass frame opening switch 91 is installed in the glass frame unit 4, and a plastic frame opening switch 93 is installed in the plastic frame assembly 7. When the glass frame unit 4 is opened alone, a contact signal from the glass frame opening switch 91 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72), and the plastic frame assembly 7 is opened from the outer frame assembly 2. Then, a contact signal from the plastic frame opening switch 93 is input to the main controller 70 (main control CPU 72). The main control CPU 72 can detect the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7 from these contact signals. When the main control CPU 72 detects the open state of the glass frame unit 4 and the plastic frame assembly 7, the main control CPU 72 generates a door opening information signal as the external information signal.

  On the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a payout control device 92 is provided. The payout control device 92 (payout control computer) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 described above. The payout control device 92 is equipped with a circuit board (payout control board) on which a payout control CPU 94 is mounted. The payout control CPU 94 is also an LSI in which a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 96 and a RAM 98 is integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). It is configured. The payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) controls the operation of the payout device unit 172 based on the prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, and executes the payout operation of the requested number of game balls. The main control CPU 72 generates a prize ball information signal as the above external information signal together with the prize ball instruction command.

  In a prize ball case (not shown) of the payout device unit 172, a payout device substrate 100 is installed together with a payout motor 102 (for example, a stepping motor). The payout device substrate 100 is provided with a drive circuit for the payout motor 102. Yes. The payout device substrate 100 specifically controls the rotation angle of the payout motor 102 based on the payout number instruction signal from the payout control device 92 (the payout control CPU 94), and pays out the designated number of game balls from the prize ball case. Let it come out. The paid-out game balls are sent to the tray unit 6 through the payout flow path in the flow path unit 173.

  Further, for example, a payout path ball cut switch 104 is installed at an upstream position of the prize ball case, and a payout counting switch 106 is installed at a downstream position of the payout motor 102. When a prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 102, a count signal from the payout count switch 106 is input to the payout device substrate 100 each time. Further, when a ball break occurs at an upstream position of the prize ball case, a contact signal from the payout path ball break switch 104 is input to the payout device substrate 100. The dispensing device substrate 100 transmits the input count signal and contact signal to the dispensing control device 92 (dispensing control CPU 94). The payout control CPU 94 can detect the actual payout number and the out-of-ball state based on the signal received from the payout device substrate 100.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a full tank switch 161, for example, inside the lower plate 6c (the position of the bowl as viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 1). The prize balls (game balls) that are actually paid out are discharged to the upper plate 6b through the flow path unit 173. When the upper plate 6b is full of game balls, As described above, it flows into the lower plate 6c. Further, when the lower plate 6c is filled with game balls, the full tank switch 161 is turned ON, and a full tank detection signal is input to the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94). In response to this, even if the payout control CPU 94 receives a prize ball instruction command from the main control CPU 72, it temporarily suspends further prize ball operations, and stores the unpaid prize ball remaining number in the RAM 98. Note that the RAM 98 can be backed up even when the power is cut off, so that even if a power failure (including momentary power failure) occurs during the game, the information on the number of remaining unsold prize balls will not be lost. .

  Further, on the back side of the pachinko machine 1, a firing solenoid 110 is installed together with the launch control board 108. In addition, a ball feeding solenoid 111 is provided in the tray unit 6. The launch control board 108, launch solenoid 110, and ball feed solenoid 111 constitute the launch control board set 174 described above, and the launch control board 108 is provided with drive circuits for the launch solenoid 110 and the ball feed solenoid 111. ing. Among these, the ball feed solenoid 111 performs an operation of sending out the game balls stored in the tray unit 6 one by one to a predetermined launch position in the launcher case. Further, the launch solenoid 110 hits the game ball sent to the launch position, and performs an operation of continuously (intermittently) launching the game balls one by one toward the game area 8 as described above. Note that the game ball is fired at intervals of, for example, about 0.6 seconds (within 100 per minute).

  On the other hand, the grip unit 16 located on the front side of the pachinko machine 1 is provided with a firing lever volume 112, a touch sensor 114, and a firing stop switch 116. Among these, the firing lever volume 112 generates an analog signal proportional to the operation amount (so-called stroke) of the firing handle by the player. The touch sensor 114 detects that the player's body is touching the grip unit 16 (launching handle) from the change in capacitance, and outputs a detection signal. The firing stop switch 116 generates a firing stop signal (contact signal) in accordance with the player's operation.

  The above receiving tray unit 6 is provided with a launch relay terminal plate 118, and each signal from the launch lever volume 112, the touch sensor 114, and the launch stop switch 116 is sent via the launch relay terminal plate 118. Sent to. The drive signal from the launch control board 108 is applied to the ball feed solenoid 111 via the launch relay terminal board 118. When the player operates the firing handle, an analog signal (which may be an encoded digital signal) is generated by the firing lever volume 112 according to the operation amount, and the firing solenoid 110 is driven based on the signal at this time. Thereby, the strength of launching a game ball is adjusted according to the operation amount of the player. The drive circuit of the firing control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110 when the detection signal from the touch sensor 114 is off (low level) or when the firing stop signal is input from the firing stop switch 116. To do. In addition to this, the launch relay terminal plate 118 is connected with a lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, and when the above-mentioned CR unit is not connected to this lending device connection terminal plate 120 such as a game ball, the launch is similarly performed. The drive circuit of the control board 108 stops driving the firing solenoid 110.

  The tray unit 6 includes a frequency display board 122 and a rental / return switch board 123. Of these, the frequency display board 122 is provided with the display of the frequency display unit (7-segment LED for 3 digits). In addition, switch modules connected to the ball lending button 10 and the return button 12 are mounted on the lending / return switch board 123, and when the ball lending button 10 or the return button 12 is operated, the operation signal is lended. And the return switch board 123 via the game ball lending device connection terminal board 120 to the CR unit. Further, a frequency signal indicating the remaining frequency of the valuable medium is transmitted from the CR unit to the frequency display board 122 via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 120. A display circuit (not shown) on the frequency display board 122 drives the display unit based on the frequency signal, and displays the remaining frequency of the valuable medium as a numerical value. In addition, when no valuable medium is inserted into the CR unit, or when the remaining frequency of the inserted valuable medium becomes zero, the display circuit of the frequency display board 122 drives the display to display a demonstration (value medium). Display for urging the user to input.

  Further, the pachinko machine 1 includes an effect control device 124 (effect control computer) as a control configuration. The effect control device 124 controls the effect accompanying the progress of the game in the pachinko machine 1. The effect control device 124 is also equipped with a circuit board (composite sub-control board) on which an effect control CPU 126 that is a central processing unit is mounted. The effect control CPU 126 includes a CPU core (not shown) and a semiconductor memory such as a ROM 128 and a RAM 130 as a main memory. The production control device 124 is provided at a position covered with the back cover unit 178 on the back side of the pachinko machine 1.

  The effect control device 124 is equipped with an input / output driver (not shown) and various peripheral ICs, as well as a lamp drive circuit 132 and an acoustic drive circuit 134. The production control CPU 126 performs production control based on the production command transmitted from the main control CPU 72, and gives commands to the lamp driving circuit 132 and the acoustic driving circuit 134 to emit various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53. Or a process of actually outputting sound effects, voices, and the like from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  The effect control device 124 and the main control device 70 are connected to each other via, for example, a communication harness (not shown). However, the communication between these is performed only in one direction from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and communication in the reverse direction is not performed. The communication harness may adopt a parallel format according to the bus widths of various commands transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, and each driver IC (I / O). A serial format may be adopted according to the hardware configuration.

  The lamp driving circuit 132 includes a switching element such as a PWM (pulse width modulation) IC or a MOSFET (not shown). The lamp driving circuit 132 switches driving voltages (or duty switching) applied to various lamps including LEDs. ) And manage the operation such as light emission and flashing. In addition to the glass frame top lamps 46 and 48, the glass frame side lamp 50, and the tray lamp 52, the various lamps include a decoration / production board lamp 53 installed in the game board unit 8. The panel lamp 53 corresponds to an LED incorporated in the above-described effect unit, or an LED incorporated in the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the like. Here, although the example in which the saucer lamp 52 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136 is given, a saucer illuminated board is installed in the saucer unit 6, and the saucer lamp 52 is interposed via the saucer illuminated board. It may be configured to be connected to the lamp driving circuit 132.

  The acoustic drive circuit 134 is, for example, a sound generator that includes a sound ROM, an acoustic control IC, an amplifier, and the like (not shown). The acoustic drive circuit 134 drives the upper speaker 54 and the lower speaker 56 to perform acoustic output. .

  In the present embodiment, a glass frame decoration board 136 is installed on the inner surface of the glass frame unit 4, and drive signals from the lamp drive circuit 132 and the acoustic drive circuit 134 pass through the glass frame decoration board 136 and various lamps 46. To 52 and speakers 54, 55, and 56. Also, the effect switching button 45 is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player operates the effect switching button 45, the contact signal is sent to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. Entered. Furthermore, the jog dial 45a is connected to the glass frame decorating board 136, and when the player rotates the jog dial 45a, the rotation signal is input to the effect control device 124 through the glass frame decorating board 136. . In addition, although the example which connected the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a to the glass frame decor substrate 136 is given here, when the above-described saucer decor board is installed, the effect switch button 45 and the jog dial 45a are the saucer decor. It may be connected to the substrate.

  In addition, a panel board 138 is installed in the game board unit 8, and a movable body motor 57 is connected to the panel board 138 in addition to the panel lamp 53. The movable body motor 57 drives the movable body 40f via a link mechanism (not shown), for example. A drive signal from the lamp drive circuit 132 is applied to the panel lamp 53 and the movable body motor 57 via the panel illumination board 138, respectively.

  The liquid crystal display 42 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display screen is visible through a substantially rectangular opening formed in the game board unit 8. Further, an inverter board 158 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the inverter board 158 generates an AC power source that is applied to a backlight (for example, a cold cathode tube) of the liquid crystal display 42. Further, an effect display control device 144 is installed on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 is controlled by the effect display control device 144. The effect display control device 144 is equipped with a display control CPU 146 that is a general-purpose central processing unit and a circuit board (effect display control board) on which a VDP 152 that is a display processor is mounted. Among these, the display control CPU 146 is configured as an LSI in which semiconductor memories such as a ROM 148 and a RAM 150 are integrated together with a CPU core (not shown). The VDP 152 is configured as an LSI in which a semiconductor core such as an image ROM 154 and a VRAM 156 is integrated with a processor core (not shown). The VRAM 156 can use a part of the storage area as a frame buffer.

  The ROM 128 of the effect control CPU 126 stores a basic program related to effect control, and the effect control CPU 126 executes effect control according to this program. The production control includes production control using various lamps 46 to 53 and speakers 54, 55, and 56 as described above, and production control by image display using the liquid crystal display 42. . The effect control CPU 126 transmits basic information (for example, effect number) related to the effect to the display control CPU 146, and the display control CPU 146 that receives the information transmits a specific effect image based on the basic information. Control the display.

  The display control CPU 146 outputs a more detailed control signal to the VDP 152. Receiving this, the VDP 152 accesses the image ROM 154 based on the control signal, reads necessary image data therefrom, and transfers it to the VRAM 156. Further, the VDP 152 expands the image data on the VRAM 156 for each frame (still image per unit time) in a frame buffer, and each pixel (full color pixel) of the liquid crystal display 42 is expanded based on the buffered image data. Drive individually.

  In addition, a power supply control unit 162 (power supply control means) is provided on the back side of the plastic frame assembly 7. The power supply control unit 162 has a built-in switching power supply circuit. When external power (for example, AC 24V) is taken from the island facility through the power cord 164, necessary power (for example, DC + 34V, + 12V) can be generated therefrom. The electric power generated by the power supply control unit 162 is distributed to the main control device 70, the payout control device 92, the effect control device 124, and the inverter board 158. Furthermore, power is supplied to the launch control board 108 via the payout control device 92, and power is supplied to the CR unit via the game ball rental device connection terminal board 120. The low voltage power for logic (for example, DC + 5V) is generated by a power supply IC (3-terminal regulator or the like) built in each device. Further, as described above, the power supply control unit 164 is grounded (grounded) to the island facility through the ground wire 166.

  The external terminal plate 160 is connected to the payout control device 92, and various external information signals generated by the main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) pass through the payout control device 92 to the external terminal plate 160. Is output to the outside. The main control device 70 (main control CPU 72) and the payout control device 92 (payout control CPU 94) can output an external information signal to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 through the external terminal board 160. The signals output from the external terminal board 160 are collected by, for example, a hall computer (not shown) in a game hall. Here, the configuration via the payout control device 92 is taken as an example, but a configuration in which an external information signal is directly output from the main control device 70 to the external terminal board 160 may be used.

  The above is a configuration example relating to the control of the pachinko machine 1. Subsequently, the configuration of the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, the second variable winning device 31, and the winning opening unit related thereto will be described. FIG. 6 is a front view showing the periphery of the winning opening unit.

[Winner unit]
As shown in FIG. 6, the winning opening unit includes a variable start winning device 28, a first variable winning device 30, and a second variable winning device 31. The variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are all provided in one base member 41z, and each of the decorative members 41a is used for teaching each position to the player. -41f are provided. Specifically, the variable start winning device 28 includes a decorative member 41e made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41f decorated with characters such as “1st”, and the opening / closing member 28b is provided between the decorative member 41e and the base member 41z. Is provided. The first variable winning device 30 disposed above the variable start winning device 28 includes a decorative member 41c made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41d decorated with characters such as “2nd”. An opening / closing member 30a is provided between the base members 41z. Similarly, the second variable winning device 31 disposed above the first variable winning device is provided with a decorative member 41a made of a transparent material and a decorative member 41b decorated with characters such as “3rd”, and the decorative member 41a. An opening / closing member 31a is provided between the base member 41b and the base member 41b.

  As described above, the variable start winning device 28, the first variable winning device 30, and the second variable winning device 31 are configured as one winning port unit, and the opening / closing member, the wall surface member, the decorative member, and the like are made common. Therefore, three winning openings can be provided in parallel in the vertical direction, and the appearance of the game board can be bathed. In addition, the second variable winning device 31 is set to be more advantageous for the player than the first variable winning device 30 that is activated during the big hit game to give the player superiority or inferiority. Can do.

  Further, the first variable winning device 30 is provided with a collection passage 30c made of a transparent material for collecting the game balls that have entered the ball on the back side of the game board unit 8, and the second variable winning device 31 is the same. Is provided with a recovery passageway 31c. The collection passage 31c is provided on the back side of the decorative member 41x made of a transparent member provided in the rolling stage 40e.

FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the behavior of the game ball in the vicinity of the prize opening unit, and FIG. 8 is a perspective view showing the vicinity of the prize opening unit excluding some transparent decorative members.
As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28 passes over the opening / closing member 28b, and is guided and opened by the wall surface member 28p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41f. It enters the ball and is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 28p passes through the back side of the LED board 41n for the variable start winning device 28, and is recovered as it is to the back side of the game board unit 8. Therefore, this means that the player can see the game ball passing on the opening / closing member 28b.

  On the other hand, the game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30 passes over the opening / closing member 30a, is guided by the wall surface member 30p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41d, and enters the opening to play the game. It is collected on the back side of the panel unit 8. Here, the game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 30p passes through the back side of the LED board 41m for the first variable prize-winning device 30, and then passes through the collection passage 30c to the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Therefore, the player can see the game ball passing over the opening / closing member 30a and the game ball passing through the collection passage 30c.

  Similarly, the game ball that has entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 passes over the opening / closing member 31a, is guided by the wall surface member 31p provided between the base member 41z and the decorative member 41b, and enters the opening. Collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. Here, the game ball after being guided into the opening by the wall surface member 31p passes through the back side of the LED board 41l for the second variable prize-winning device 31, and then passes through the collection passage 31c to the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Therefore, the player can see the game ball passing over the opening / closing member 31a and the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c. Further, the collection passage 31c provided in the second variable prize winning device 31 has a structure in which the distance in the passage is longer than the collection passage 30c provided in the first variable prize winning device 30, and the collection passage 30c is in the vertical direction. Is installed in the horizontal direction. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c for a long time. In addition, since the collection passage 30c is located at the lower right lower portion of the game area 8a, the collection passage 31c is located at the center of the game area 8a, so that the player can further see the game ball passing through the collection passage 31c. It can be made easier.

  Further, the collection passage 31c provided in the second variable prize winning device 31 is located at the back side of the central opening position of the decorative member (non-transparent) 41y provided on the back side of the transparent decorative member 41x provided in the rolling stage 40e. The game ball passing through the collection passage 31c is released in a form of dropping downward from the central opening position of the decorative member 41y. The game balls released from the collection passage 31c are collected by a storage device 31t (not shown) and then collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. Accordingly, when the player releases the game ball 31c, the player cannot visually recognize the game ball.

  Here, as the types of jackpots, the 10th round jackpot and the 16th round jackpot are defined, and the first variable winning device 30 is operated up to the 1st to 10th rounds (satisfying a predetermined first condition) and the 11th to 16th rounds. When the second variable winning device 31 is operated (when the predetermined second condition is satisfied), the big win that can win more prize balls is the 16 round big hit, so the second variable winning device in the big win game The player desires that 31 operates. And if the game ball is entered when the second variable prize winning device 31 is operating, it can pass through the collection passage 31c for a long time, so that it is not a normal big hit (10 round big hit). It is a big hit (16 rounds big hit), and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that it is in a good state where a lot of winning balls can be obtained for 6 rounds, and a sense of superiority can be given. In addition, a recovery passageway 31c is provided at the lower part of the display screen, so that it is possible to enjoy the big hit effect being performed on the display screen while watching the game ball passing through the recovery passageway 31c. In the case of 10 rounds of big win (when the predetermined first condition is satisfied), only the first variable winning device 30 is operated, and in the case of 16 rounds of big win (when the predetermined second condition is satisfied) The same effect can be obtained when only the two variable winning device 31 is operated.

  Further, the position at which the game ball is discharged from the collection passage 31c (the central opening position of the decorative member 41y) is located directly above the middle start winning opening 26, and the game ball released from the collection passage 31c is The player can be reminded as if he entered the middle start winning opening 26.

[Variable start winning device 28 and first variable winning device 30]
9 and 10 are diagrams for explaining the details of the variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 9, the back side of the base member 41z is provided with a normal electric accessory solenoid 88 as a power source of the variable start winning device 28 and a link mechanism 88l for transmitting the power from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 28b. An LED board 41q is provided above the opening / closing member 28b of the variable start winning device 28, and lighting control or the like is performed when the variable start winning device 28 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED board 41n. In order to detect a game ball that has entered the variable start winning device 28, a right start winning port switch 82 is provided below the wall member 28p.

  Similarly, the first variable winning device 30 has a first large winning opening solenoid 90 as a power source of the first variable winning device 30 and a link mechanism 90l for transmitting the power from the opening and closing member 30a on the back side of the base member 41z. Is provided. In addition, an LED board 41p is provided on the upper part of the opening / closing member 30a of the first variable winning device 30, and lighting control or the like is performed when the first variable winning device 30 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED board 41m. . Further, in order to detect a game ball that has entered the first variable winning device 30, a first count switch 84 is provided below the wall surface member 30p.

FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining details of the variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30 from the game board surface side.
As shown in FIG. 10, the game ball entering the first variable winning device 30 is guided by the opening / closing member 30a and the wall surface member 30p, and after passing through the first major winning port count switch 84, the inside of the collection passage 30c. It passes and is collected on the back side of the game board unit 8. The game balls entering the variable start winning device 28 are guided by the opening / closing member 28b and the wall surface member 28p, and after passing through the right start winning port switch 82, pass through the collection passage 28c and the game board unit 8. Collected on the back side. Here, the recovery passage 28c is provided adjacent to the recovery passage 30c, and is configured by the same first recovery passage member 30c1. In addition, each collection | recovery channel | path 28c and each collection | recovery channel | path 30c can be comprised by couple | bonding with the 2nd collection | recovery channel | path member (not shown) corresponding to the 1st collection | recovery channel | path member 30c1.

FIGS. 11 to 13 are diagrams for explaining the details of the second variable winning device 31.
As shown in FIG. 11, on the back side of the base member 41z, a second large prize opening solenoid 97 as a power source of the second variable prize winning device 31 and a link mechanism 97l for transmitting the power from the solenoid to the opening / closing member 31a are provided. . In addition, an LED board 41o is provided above the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31, and lighting control or the like is performed when the second variable winning device 31 is operated (opening / closing operation) together with the LED substrate 41l. . In order to detect a game ball that has entered the second variable prize-winning device 31, a second count switch 85 is provided below the wall surface member 31p.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 passes through the collection passage 31c. The recovery passage 31c is formed by coupling a first recovery passage member 31c1 (not shown) and a second recovery passage member 31c2. In addition, an opening is provided at a lower position of the second count switch 85 of the second collection passage member 31c2, and a discharge member 31e for discharging the game ball to the back side of the game board unit 8 is provided in the opening. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 13, there may be a case where a predetermined number (for example, about 20) of game balls stays in the collection passage 31c. At that time, it becomes impossible for the game ball to enter the second variable winning device 31 that is operating, that is, it is disadvantageous for the player because a large amount of prize balls cannot be paid out to the player in a big hit game in a short time. It becomes a state. Therefore, an opening is provided upstream of the collection passage 31c, and the game ball after passing through the second count switch 85 is discharged from the discharge member 31e provided in the opening to the back side of the game board unit 8, thereby It is possible to enter the variable winning device 31.

FIG. 14 is a cross-sectional view showing the periphery of the opening provided upstream of the recovery passageway 31c.
As shown in FIG. 14, the first collection passage member 31c1 and the second collection passage member 31c2 are combined to form a collection passage 31c. A second count switch 85 is provided at the entrance of the collection passage 31c, and the collection is performed. An opening is provided in the second recovery passage member 31c2 upstream of the passage 31c. The collection passage 31c is provided with three guide ribs rx, ry, rz. The first guide rib rx and the third guide rib rz are provided on the first collection passage member 31c1, and the second guide. The rib ry is provided on the second collection passage member 31c2. The first guide rib rx is located in front of the opening of the second collection passage member 31c2, the second guide rib ry is located below the opening, and the third guide rib rz is more than the second guide rib ry. Located below.

Next, the structure about each guide rib and those periphery is demonstrated in detail.
The inner diameter (ra) of the second count switch 85 is about 11.7 mm, the first guide rib rx protrudes about 1 mm (rb) from the first recovery passage member 31c1, and the game ball passes through the second count switch 85. Thus, when falling, the first guide rib rx is hardly contacted. The second guide rib ry protrudes about 1.7 mm (rc) inward from the end of the inner diameter of the second count switch 85 and protrudes about 1 mm (rd) from the second collection passage member 31c2, so that the game ball is The structure is such that the second guide rib ry is likely to come into contact with the second guide rib ry when falling through the second count switch 85. The inner diameter of the recovery passage 31c formed by joining the first recovery passage member 31c1 and the second recovery passage 31c2 is about 13 mm (re). The third guide rib rz protrudes about 1 mm (rf) from the first collection passage member 31c1 similarly to the first guide rib rx. The opening of the second collection passage member 31 c 2 provided below the second count switch 85 has a height of about 21 mm (rh) and is gently inclined toward the back side of the game board unit 8.

  15 and 16 are diagrams for explaining the behavior of the game ball flowing into the collection passage 31c. As shown in FIG. 15, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 contacts the second guide rib ry on the second recovery passage member 31c2, and the opening provided in the second recovery passage member 31c2 It will be guided to the collection passage 31c side without being guided. Therefore, unless a plurality of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c or a ball clogging occurs, the game balls that have entered the second variable prize-winning device 31 come into contact with the second guide rib ry to collect the game balls. The player passes through the passage 31c, and the player can visually recognize the passage.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the game ball stays upstream of the collection passage 31c, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 is discharged from the opening provided in the second collection passage member 31c2. It passes through the member 31e and is discharged to the back side of the game board unit 8. Specifically, when the game ball stays up to the upstream of the recovery passageway 31c, the third guide rib rz protrudes from the first recovery passageway member 31c1 when stacked up to the third guide rib rz. The three guide ribs rz are stacked on the opposite side. Then, when the game balls are stacked up to the second guide rib ry, the second guide rib rz protrudes from the second collection passage member 31c2, and thus is stacked on the side opposite to the second guide rib ry. Thereafter, the game ball that has passed through the second count switch 85 in a state where the game ball stays upstream of the recovery passageway 31c is stacked on the game ball stacked on the side opposite to the second guide rib ry. Become. However, since the first guide rib rx is difficult to be stacked on the first recovery passage member 31c1 side, it is guided to the opposite second recovery passage member 31c2 side, and finally provided on the second recovery passage member 31c2. From the opened opening, it passes through the discharge member 31e and is discharged to the back side of the game board unit 8.

  As described above, even if a plurality of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c or a ball is clogged and the game balls stay up to the upstream of the collection passage 31c, the first to third guide ribs By providing rx, ry, rz in the collection passage 31c, the function of the second variable winning device 31 can be ensured. For example, it is possible to pay out a large amount of prize balls to a player in a big hit game without impeding the entry of game balls into the second variable prize winning device 31 that is operating, and due to the occurrence of a clogged ball. Without giving the player a sense of anxiety, it is possible to enjoy a big hit game with peace of mind and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Next, a storage device 31t that stores game balls discharged from the collection passage 31c will be described. FIG. 17 is a perspective view showing the periphery of the storage device 31t.
As shown in FIG. 17, the storage device 31t is provided on the back side of the collection passage 26o for discharging the game ball that has entered the middle start winning opening 26 to the back side of the game board unit 8, and the entrance of the storage device 31t is collected. It is provided at the outlet of the passage 31c. In addition, since the entrance of the collection passage 26o and the discharge port of the collection passage 31c are provided on the same vertical axis, whether the game ball released from the collection passage 31c has entered the middle start winning opening 26 or not. It can be reminiscent of the player like this.

18 to 20 are exploded perspective views illustrating the storage device 31t.
The storage device 31t includes a base member 31t2 as a base, a cover member 31t1 that forms a game ball passage 31g between the base member 31t2, an effect switch 85e that detects a game ball passing through the passage 31g, and a passage 31g. An opening / closing member 31j that dams a game ball passing through the production switch 85e, a storage device solenoid 31s that is a movable source for moving the opening / closing member 31j, and a link member that transmits the movement of the storage device solenoid 31s to the opening / closing member 31j. 31l. When the storage device solenoid 31s operates back and forth, the link member 31l rotates around the pin 31lp located in the center of the link member 31l, and the opening / closing member 31j is moved back and forth in conjunction with each other. .

  As shown in FIG. 20, the upper surface of the opening / closing member 31j has a structure in which the end on the passage 31g side is inclined. For example, even if the game ball passes through the passage 31g when the opening / closing member 31j is moving, it is possible to make it difficult to sandwich the game ball between the wall surface of the passage 31g and the end of the opening / closing member 31j. Storage in the collection passage 31c can be executed reliably.

  An effect switch 85e for detecting a game ball passing through the passage 31g is provided in the vicinity of the back of the middle start winning opening 26. When the effect switch 85e detects the passage of the game ball, the effect switch 85e is located below the middle start winning opening 26. The LED lamp 40l provided in can be turned on. Further, the number of game balls staying in the collection passage 31c can be calculated by using the second count switch 85 provided at the entrance of the second variable winning device 31 and the effect switch 85e. By using the number of game balls, the range of effects can be expanded. For example, when it is desired to store a predetermined number of game balls in the collection passage 31c, the storage device solenoid 31s is not operated when the storage device solenoid 31s is operated until it reaches that number, or when it is desired to flow without storing the game balls. Can be activated. In addition, by adopting a structure in which the opening / closing members 31j can be sequentially fed one by one, the number of game balls in the collection passage 31c can be strictly managed, and the range of effects can be further widened.

FIGS. 21-23 is a figure explaining the operation example of the storage apparatus 31t.
As shown in FIG. 21, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is in an inoperative state, the iron core that protrudes from the storage device solenoid 31s is fixed in a state of being pushed back by a spring (not shown). Has been. And when the iron core pushes in the link member 31l, the opening / closing member 31j is pulled toward the storage device solenoid 31s, and as a result, the passage 31g is opened.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 22, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is in an operating state (when excited and driven), the iron core is fixed in a state of being pulled into the storage device solenoid 31s. Then, the iron core pulls the link member 31l, thereby pushing the opening / closing member 31j toward the passage 31 and consequently closing the passage 31g.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 23, when the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is operated, the opening / closing member 31j is pushed out toward the passage 31, and the game ball flowing down the passage 31g in the storage device 31t is blocked. Can do. As a result, the game ball cannot be released from the collection passage 31c, and the game ball is stored in the collection passage 31c.

  As described above, when the game ball passes for a long time in the recovery passageway 31c having a longer stay time than the recovery passageways 28c, 30c of the other variable start winning device 28 and the first variable winning device 30, the storage is performed. It is possible to execute a novel effect such as operating the device 31t and storing the game ball in the collection passage 31c. In addition, by storing a large number of game balls in the long collection passage 31c, it is possible to perform an effect that expects more balls to be obtained from now on, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game. For example, during a big hit game, a large number of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c, and the reserved continuous chain is informed, thereby giving the player the impression of being added to a single hit ball. It is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the next time.

  Next, control processing executed by the main control CPU 72 of the main control device 70 will be described.

[Reset start (main) processing]
When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, the main control CPU 72 starts a reset start process. The reset start process restores the gaming state based on the backup information saved at the previous power shutdown (so-called power recovery) or conversely clears the backup information, thereby adjusting the initial state of the pachinko machine 1 Process. The reset start process is positioned as a main process (main control program) for guaranteeing a stable gaming operation of the pachinko machine 1 after adjusting the initial state.

  24 and 25 are flowcharts illustrating a procedure example of the reset start process. Hereinafter, the process performed by the main control CPU 72 will be described step by step.

  Step S101: First, the main control CPU 72 sets the top address of the stack area in the stack pointer.

  Step S102: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 sets a vector-type interrupt mode (mode 2) and corrects the default RST-type interrupt mode (mode 0). Thus, thereafter, the main control CPU 72 can refer to an arbitrary address (however, the least significant bit is 0) as an interrupt vector and execute a designated interrupt handler.

  Step S103: The main control CPU 72 executes a standby process at reset. This process is for securing a certain standby time (for example, about several thousand ms) at the time of reset start (for example, power-on) and checking the main power-off detection signal during that time. Specifically, when the main control CPU 72 sets the loop counter for the waiting time, the main control CPU 72 bit-checks the input port of the main power-off detection signal while decrementing the value of the loop counter. The main power-off detection signal is input from, for example, a power monitoring IC that is a peripheral device. If the input of the main power-off detection signal is confirmed before the loop counter reaches 0, the main control CPU 72 restarts the process from the beginning. As a result, for example, the system can be protected when a main power switch (not shown) is turned on and off repeatedly within a short time (about 1 to 2 seconds).

  Step S104: Next, the main control CPU 72 permits access to the work area of the RAM 76. Specifically, the RAM protect setting value in the work area is reset (00H). As a result, thereafter, access to the work area of the RAM 76 is permitted.

  Step S105: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of a mask register in order to set an interrupt mask. Specifically, a value for enabling the CTC interrupt is stored in the mask register.

  Step S106: The main control CPU 72 refers to the input signal from the previously cleared RAM clear switch and confirms whether or not the RAM clear switch has been operated (switch ON). If the RAM clear switch is not operated (No), step S107 is executed next.

  Step S107: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not backup information is stored in the RAM 76, that is, whether or not a backup validity determination flag is set. If the backup is normally completed in the previous power-off process and the backup validity determination flag (for example, “A55AH”) is set (Yes), then the main control CPU 72 executes step S108.

  Step S108: The main control CPU 72 executes a sum check on the backup information in the RAM 76. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sum-checks all areas of the work area of the RAM 76 (a user work area including a use-prohibited area and a stack area) except the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer. If the result of the sum check is normal (Yes), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S109.

Step S109: The main control CPU 72 resets the backup validity determination flag (for example, “0000H”).
Step S110: Also, the main control CPU 72 clears the command waiting for transmission immediately before the previous power-off occurrence.

  Step S111: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect control command generation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a return command for the effect control device 124. For example, power return designation command, model code designation command, special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation command, special figure 2 symbol confirmation designation command, special figure 1 hold designation command, special figure 2 hold designation command, short time designation command, special number designation A command, an ST number designation command, a firing position designation command, and the like are generated. The generated command is output to the effect control device 124 in a process (subcommand transmission process: step S123) described later. In response to this, the production control device 124 produces the production state (for example, the internal probability state, the production symbol display mode, the working memory number production display mode, the sound output content, and the like that were being executed at the time of the previous power shutdown. The light emission state etc. of the lamp can be restored.

  Here, the power return designation command is a command (for example, 8100) representing a state in which the gaming machine is powered on and restored. The model code designation command is a command (for example, 9xzz (a value representing a gaming state based on backup information is input to zz)) indicating the model information of the gaming machine. If there are multiple types of gaming machines that have been diverted while maintaining the same contents, but with different jackpot chances, etc., the type of gaming machine that is being used is the model A command represented as information (for example, MAX type: 90zz, middle type: 91zz, sweet digital type: 92zz). In addition, one of the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command and the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation designation command is transmitted (if both the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be changed simultaneously, both commands are transmitted). For each command, a command representing a symbol corresponding to the winning type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (for example, A5dd, for example) when it is changing based on the backup information , A6dd), and a command indicating that it is stopped when it is not changing (for example, special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation 0 command (A500)) Sometimes A500 is sent)). The special figure 1 hold designation command and the special figure 2 hold designation command are commands (for example, A0 mm, A1 mm (00 to 04 are input for mm) indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively. (Specifically, 01 to 04 are input at the time of increase (at the time of winning), and 00 to 03 are input at the time of subtraction (at the start of fluctuation))). The time reduction number designation command is a command that represents the number of times the special symbol is changed and displayed until the time reduction state (electric support state) ends (for example, 86jj (a corresponding numerical value is input to jj). )). The special number designation command is a command representing the number of times of special symbol variation display performed until the selection processing of the special variation pattern selection table is completed (for example, C3kk (a corresponding numerical value is input to kk). )). The ST number designation command is a command that represents the number of times of special symbol change display that is performed until the state where the lottery probability related to the special symbol is high (for example, 87 ss (ss is a numerical value corresponding to ss). Is entered)). The firing position designation command is a command that represents the launch position of a game ball that is advantageous to the player (for example, C0lr (00 is entered when left-handed and 01 when right-handed).

  Step S112: The main control CPU 72 executes state return processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets various values in the work area of the RAM 76 based on the backup information, and the gaming state (for example, the display state of special symbols, the internal probability state, The operation memory contents, various flag states, random number update states, etc.) are restored. Further, the main control CPU 72 restores the backed up PC register value.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is operated at power-on (step S106: Yes), when the backup validity determination flag is not set (step S107: No), or when the backup information is not normal. (Step S108: No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to Step S113.

Step S113: The main control CPU 72 clears the stored contents other than the use prohibited area of the RAM 76. As a result, the work area and stack area of the RAM 76 are all initialized, and even if valid backup information is stored, the contents are erased.
Step S114: Also, the main control CPU 72 performs initial setting of the RAM 76.

  Step S115: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect control command generation process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a command (command necessary for effect control) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124 after the initial setting. For example, RAM clear notification command (power-on factor designation command), model code designation command, special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation 0 command, special figure 1 hold designation 0 command, special figure 2 hold designation 0 command, short time count designation 0 command, A special number designation 0 command, an ST number designation 0 command, a firing position designation 0 command, and the like are generated. The generated command is output to the effect control device 124 in a process (subcommand transmission process: step S123) described later.

  Here, the RAM clear notification command (power-on factor designation command) is a command (for example, CFhh) indicating that the RAM 76 has been cleared, and the command value (hh) differs depending on the timing of clearing. The special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation 0 command is a command indicating that the special symbol is not variably displayed (for example, A500). In addition, the special figure 1 hold designation 0 command is a command indicating that there is no operation memory related to the first special symbol (for example, A000). Further, the special figure 2 hold designation 0 command is a command indicating that there is no operation memory related to the second special symbol (for example, A100). Also, the time-saving number designation 0 command is a command indicating that the current gaming state is not the time shortening state (electric support state) (for example, 8600). The special number designation command is a command indicating that the current state is not a state for selecting a special variation pattern selection table (for example, C300). The ST number designation command is a command indicating that the current state is a state in which the lottery probability regarding the special symbol is not high (for example, 8700). The firing position designation 0 command is a command indicating that the launch position of the game ball that is advantageous to the player is the reference launch position (left-handed) (for example, C000).

  Step S116: The main control CPU 72 executes a payout control output process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs an instruction command for starting the payout of prize balls to the payout control device 92.

  Step S117: The main control CPU 72 executes CTC initial setting processing, and performs initial setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) that is a peripheral device. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an interrupt vector register and sets an interrupt count value (for example, 4 ms) in the CTC. As a result, when a CTC interrupt occurs next time, the main control CPU 72 can continue the processing from the program address of the PC register that has been backed up.

  When the above procedure is executed in the reset start process, the main control CPU 72 shifts to the main loop shown in FIG. 25 (connection symbol A → A).

  Step S118, Step S119: The main control CPU 72 executes the power interruption occurrence check process after prohibiting interruption. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs bit check on the input port of the main power-off detection signal and monitors the occurrence of power-off (decrease in drive voltage). When the power cut-off occurs, the main control CPU 72 clears the output port buffer corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, the second big prize opening solenoid 97, etc., and then backs up the work area of the RAM 76. The entire contents except the validity judgment flag and the sum check buffer are backed up, and the sum result value is stored in the sum check buffer. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the above effective value (for example, “A55AH”) in the backup validity determination flag area, prohibits access to the RAM 76, and stops (NOP) the process. On the other hand, if the power shutoff does not occur, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S120. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU executes the process at the time of the occurrence of power interruption as a non-maskable interrupt (NMI) process.

  Step S120: The main control CPU 72 executes an initial value update random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 increments random numbers for updating (changing) initial values of various software random numbers. In this embodiment, jackpot determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) and various random numbers excluding hit determined random numbers (hardware random numbers) corresponding to ordinary symbols (for example, jackpot symbol random numbers, reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) Is generated in the program. These software random numbers are updated by a loop counter within a predetermined range in another interrupt process (step S201 in FIG. 27). In this process, the initial value of the loop counter (all The random number of may not be the target). The initial value updating random number is used to randomly change the initial value, and in step S120, the initial value updating random number is updated. Note that the reason why step S120 is executed after interrupts are prohibited in step S118 is the same as another interrupt management process (step S202 in FIG. 27). ) To prevent the above). As described above, in the present embodiment, the big hit determined random number and the hit determined random number are hardware random numbers generated by the random number generator 75, and the update cycle is faster than the timer interrupt cycle (for example, several ms). Since it is (for example, several μs), it is not necessary to update the big hit determined random number and the initial value of the hit determined random number.

  Step S123: The main control CPU 72 executes a subcommand transmission process. In this processing, it is confirmed whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) that the main control CPU 72 should transmit to the presentation control device 124 in the command buffer. Output port. Specifically, it is checked whether there is a command set in a predetermined buffer (ring buffer) of the RAM 76, and if there is a command in the buffer, the command to be output is output to the port. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S124: The main control CPU 72 clears the predetermined buffer (port output request buffer) when the command is output to the effect control device 124 in the previous process (step S123).

  Step S125, Step S126: The main control CPU 72 permits interruption and executes other random number update processing. The random numbers updated by this processing are random numbers (reach determination random numbers, variation pattern determination random numbers, etc.) that are not related to the determination of the winning type (winning type) among software random numbers. This process is performed in the remaining time when a timer interrupt occurs during execution of the main loop and the main control CPU 72 executes another interrupt management process (FIG. 27). The contents of the interrupt management process will be described later.

[Power failure check processing]
FIG. 26 is a flowchart specifically illustrating a procedure example of the power-off occurrence check process.
Step S130: First, the main control CPU 72 sets a condition for checking the occurrence of power interruption. This check condition can be set as an on-counter value for confirming that the main power-off detection signal is continuously output, for example.

  Step S132: Next, the main control CPU 72 reads the main power-off detection switch input port and confirms whether or not the main power-off detection signal is output (checks a specific bit). Although not particularly illustrated, the main power-off detection switch is mounted on the main controller 70, for example, and this main power-off detection switch monitors the drive voltage supplied from the power control unit 162, and the voltage level is monitored. When the voltage falls below the reference voltage, the main power-off detection signal is output. Note that the main power-off detection switch may be built in the power control unit 162. When the main control CPU 72 confirms that the main power-off detection signal is not output at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 exits this process and returns to the reset start process. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the main power-off detection signal is output (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S134.

  Step S134: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the above check conditions are satisfied. Specifically, for example, 1 is subtracted from the on-counter value set in the previous step S130, and it is confirmed whether or not the result is 0. If the on-counter value is not yet 0 at this time (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to step S132 and reconfirms the main power-off detection switch input port. When the check condition is satisfied by repeating the loop from step S134 to step S132 (step S134: Yes), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S136.

  Step S136: The main control CPU 72 uses the test signal terminal and the command control signal in addition to the output ports corresponding to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize opening solenoid 90, and the second big prize opening solenoid 97 as described above. Clear the corresponding output port buffer.

Step S138, Step S140: Next, the main control CPU 72 adds the entire contents excluding the backup validity determination flag and the sum check buffer in the work area of the RAM 76 in units of 1 byte, and repeats until the addition is completed for all areas. .
Step S142: When the calculation of the sum is completed for all the areas (Step S140: Yes), the main control CPU 72 stores the sum result value in the sum check buffer.

Step S144: Next, the main control CPU 72 stores the valid value in the backup validity determination flag area as described above.
Step S146: Further, the main control CPU 72 stores “01H” indicating access prohibition in the protect value of the RAM 76, and prohibits access to the work area (including the use prohibition area and the stack area) of the RAM 76.
Step S148: Then, the main control CPU 72 enters a standby loop, and stops all other processes in preparation for shutting off the main power supply. After the main power is cut off, the backup power is supplied from a backup power circuit (not shown) (for example, a circuit including a capacitive element mounted on the main controller 70), so the stored contents of the RAM 76 are lost even after the main power is turned off. Held without. The backup power supply circuit may be incorporated in the power supply control unit 162, for example.

  Through the above processing, all the information stored in the work area of the RAM 76 to be backed up (sum added) is retained in the RAM 76 even after the main power is turned off. The stored memory is restored as backup information when the power is turned off after confirming the normality of the checksum in the previous reset start process (FIG. 24).

[Interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing)]
Next, interrupt management processing (timer interrupt processing) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of interrupt management processing. The main control CPU 72 executes an interrupt management process every predetermined time (for example, several ms) based on the interrupt request signal from the counter / timer circuit. Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S200: First, the main control CPU 72 saves the values of the registers (accumulator A, flag register F, and general-purpose registers B to L) used during execution of the main loop in the save area of the RAM 76. Another value can be written in the registers (A to L) after the value is saved in the interrupt management process.

  Step S201: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a lottery random number update process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 updates the value of the counter for generating various random numbers for lottery. The value of each counter is incremented in the counter area of the RAM 76 and loops within a specified range. Various random numbers include, for example, jackpot symbol random numbers.

  Step S202: The main control CPU 72 executes the initial value update random number update process also here. The content of the process is the same as described above.

  Step S203: The main control CPU 72 executes input processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 inputs various switch signals from an input / output (I / O) port 79. Specifically, a passing detection signal from the gate switch 78, a winning detection signal from the middle start winning port switch 80, the right starting winning port switch 82, the first count switch 84, the second count switch 85, and the winning port switch 86. Read the input state (ON / OFF).

  Step S204: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes switch input event processing. In this process, among the switch signals input in the previous input process, the determination of an event occurring during the game is made based on the winning detection signals from the gate switch 78, the middle start winning opening switch 80, and the right starting winning opening switch 82. Depending on the event that occurred, further processing is executed. The specific contents of the switch input event process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In this embodiment, when a winning detection signal (ON) is input from the middle start winning opening switch 80 or the right starting winning opening switch 82, the main control CPU 72 performs internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol, respectively. It is determined that an event that triggers the event (lottery opportunity) has occurred. Further, when a passage detection signal (ON) is input from the gate switch 78, the main control CPU 72 determines that an event serving as a lottery trigger corresponding to the normal symbol has occurred. If it is determined that any event has occurred, the main control CPU 72 executes a process corresponding to each event. Note that processing executed when a winning detection signal is input from the middle start winning port switch 80 or the right starting winning port switch 82 will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S205, Step S206: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol game process and a normal symbol game process during the interrupt management process. These processes are for specifically proceeding with the game in the pachinko machine 1. Of these, in the special symbol game process (step S205), the main control CPU 72 controls the execution of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol described above, or the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 34. 2 Controls the display of fluctuation and stop by the special symbol display device 35, and controls the operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 according to the display result. Details of the special symbol game process will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  In the normal symbol game process (step S206), the main control CPU 72 controls the variable display and stop display by the normal symbol display device 33 described above, and operates the variable start winning device 28 according to the display result. Or control. For example, the main control CPU 72 stores a random number (ordinary random number per symbol) acquired in response to the passage of the start gate 20 in the previous switch input event processing (step S204). The random number value is read out from the memory, and it is determined whether or not it falls within a predetermined hit range (operation lottery execution means). When the random number value falls within the hit range, the normal symbol display device 33 displays the normal symbol in a variable manner, and after stopping the normal symbol in a predetermined hit state, the main control CPU 72 switches the normal electric accessory solenoid 88 on. Excitingly activates the variable start winning device 28 (movable piece actuating means). On the other hand, if the random number value is out of the hit range, the main control CPU 72 performs a normal symbol stop display in a manner of deviation after the variable display.

  Step S207: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes prize ball payout processing. In this process, based on the winning detection signals input from the various switches 82, 84, 85, 86 in the previous input process (step S203), a prize ball instruction command for instructing the payout control device 92 the number of prize balls. Is output.

  Step S208: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes external information processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sends the above-mentioned external information signals (for example, prize ball information, door opening information, symbol determination number information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) to the hall computer of the game hall through the external terminal board 160. Store in port output request buffer.

  In this embodiment, among the various external information signals, for example, “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” are output to the outside as jackpot information, so that an external electronic device (data display) connected to the pachinko machine 1 is displayed. Various jackpot information can be provided (external information signal output means). In other words, the jackpot information is divided into a plurality of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” and output, so that the type of jackpot (winning type) from these combinations can be tabulated and managed by a hall computer (not shown) or internal Recognize changes in the probability state (low probability state or high probability state) or shortened state of symbol variation time, or generate a small hit (a hit where the condition device does not work) that is not classified as a “big hit” even if it is not winning Can be aggregated and managed. Based on the jackpot information, for example, a data display device (not shown) counts and displays the number of jackpot occurrences within the past several business days for each pachinko machine 1, and recognizes whether or not each jackpot is currently hit Or can recognize whether or not each symbol is currently in a shortened state of the symbol variation time. In this external information processing, the main control CPU 72 controls each output state (set of ON or OFF) of “big hit 1” to “big hit 5” in detail.

  Step S209: Further, the main control CPU 72 executes test signal processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates various test signals representing its internal state (for example, normal symbol game management state, special symbol game management state, jackpot, probability variation function in operation, time reduction function in operation). These are stored in the port output request buffer. With this test signal, for example, the internal state of the main control CPU 72 can be tested outside the main controller 70.

  Step S210: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes display output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 performs the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol display device 34, the second special symbol display device 35, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol. The lighting state of the operation memory lamp 35a, the game state display device 38, etc. is controlled. Specifically, the drive signal stored in the port output request buffer is output to the port in the previous special symbol game process (step S205) or the normal symbol game process (step S206). The drive signal is stored in the port output request buffer as byte data to be applied to each LED. As a result, each LED is driven in a predetermined display mode (a mode of performing symbol variation display, stop display, working memory number display, game state display, etc.).

  Step S211: The main control CPU 72 executes output management processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 outputs the external information signal (byte data) stored in the port output request buffer in the previous external information processing (step S208). In addition, the main control CPU 72 combines the drive signals, test signals, etc. of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 88, the first big prize winning solenoid 90, and the second big prize winning solenoid 97 stored in the port output request buffer. Output.

  In the present embodiment, an example is given in which the processing (game control program module) in steps S205 to S211 is executed as a timer interrupt processing. However, these processing are incorporated into the main loop of the CPU and executed. There are also known programming examples.

  Step S214: When the above processing is completed, the main control CPU 72 stores a value (01H) for designating the end of interrupt in the interrupt program counter, and ends the CTC interrupt.

  Step S215, Step S216: Then, the main control CPU 72 restores the saved values of the registers (A to L) and permits the next CTC interrupt. Thereafter, the main control CPU 72 returns to the main loop (program address indicated by the stack pointer).

[Switch input event processing]
FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 27). Each procedure will be described below.

  Step S10: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the middle start winning opening switch 80 corresponding to the first special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S12 and executes the first special symbol memory update process. Specific processing contents will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, when no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S14.

  Step S14: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input (a lottery opportunity is generated) from the right start winning port switch 82 corresponding to the second special symbol. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S16 and executes the second special symbol memory update process. Here again, the details of the specific processing will be further described later using another flowchart. On the other hand, if there is no input of a winning detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S18.

  Step S18: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the first count switch 84 corresponding to the first big winning opening of the first variable winning device 30. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S20 and executes the first big winning mouth count process. In the first grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the first variable prize winning device 30 for each round during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S21a.

  Step S21a: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not a winning detection signal is input from the second count switch 85 corresponding to the second big winning opening of the second variable winning device 31. When the input of the winning detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S21b and executes the second big winning mouth count process. In the second grand prize winning count process, the main control CPU 72 counts the number of winning balls to the second variable prize winning device 31 during the big hit game. On the other hand, if no winning detection signal is input (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S22.

  Step S22: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the gate switch 78 corresponding to the normal symbol. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S24 and executes the normal symbol memory update process. In the normal symbol memory update process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current number of normal symbol working memories is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4), and if it does not reach the upper limit number, obtains a random number per normal symbol To do. Further, the main control CPU 72 increments the normal symbol operation memory number by one. Then, the main control CPU 72 stores the acquired random value per normal symbol in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S26.

  Step S26: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not a passage detection signal is input from the effect switch 85e provided in the storage device 31t. When the input of the passage detection signal is confirmed (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S28 and executes a storage passage passage confirmation process. In the storage passage confirmation passing process, an effect command for transmitting information that the game ball has passed through the passage of the storage device 31t to the effect control device 124 is generated. The produced effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). On the other hand, when there is no input of the passage detection signal (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 27).

[First special symbol memory update process]
FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the first special symbol memory update process (step S12 in FIG. 28). Hereinafter, the procedure of the first special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S30: First, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the first special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value (for example, 4). The working memory number counter represents the number (the number of sets) of big hit determination random numbers and big hit symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. That is, the random number storage area of the RAM 76 is divided into four sections (for example, 2 bytes each) for each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and each section contains a big hit decision random number and a big hit symbol random number. Each can be stored as a set. At this time, if the value of the working memory number counter corresponding to the first special symbol has reached the maximum value (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event processing (FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter is less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S31.

  Step S31: The main control CPU 72 adds one first special symbol working memory number. The first special symbol operation memory number counter is stored, for example, in the operation memory number area of the RAM 76, and the main control CPU 72 increments (+1) the value. Based on the counter value added here, the lighting state of the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27).

  Step S32: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of first lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The random value is acquired by specifying the pin address of the random number generator 75. In the case where the main control CPU 72 performs 8-bit processing, the address designation is performed twice for each upper byte and lower byte. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot determination random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot determination random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S33: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the first special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The acquisition of the random number value is also performed by designating the address of the jackpot symbol random number counter area. When the main control CPU 72 reads the jackpot symbol random number value from the designated address, the main control CPU 72 saves it at the transfer destination address as a jackpot symbol random number corresponding to the first special symbol.

  Step S34: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 as a random value related to the variation condition of the first special symbol (variation pattern determination element acquisition). means). Similarly, these random number values are acquired by designating the address of the random number counter area for variation. Then, when the main control CPU 72 acquires the reach determination random number and the variation pattern determination random number from the designated address, it saves them in the transfer destination address.

  Step S35: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the first special symbol, and these random numbers are stored in the empty section in the area. To memorize as a set. The order (for example, first to fourth) is set in the plurality of sections. If all the first to fourth sections are empty at this stage, the random numbers are stored in order from the first section. Alternatively, if the first section is already filled and the other second to fourth sections are empty, the random numbers are stored in order from the second section. Note that the random number storage area is read out in a FIFO (First In First Out) format.

  Step S36: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current special game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not during the big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S37 and S38. If it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S37 and S38 and proceeds to step S38a. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the incoming ball generated during the big hit.

  Step S37: When the jackpot is not a big hit (Step S36: No), the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the first special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of fluctuation) based on the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number of the first special symbol respectively acquired in the previous steps S32 to S34, and thereby the production contents This is for determination (so-called “look ahead”). The specific processing contents will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S38: After returning from the at-acquisition effect determination process, the main control CPU 72 next sets the upper bytes (for example, “B8H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command for the first special symbol. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the first special symbol”. Since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous acquisition effect determination process (step S37), the upper byte is combined with the lower byte, for example. Will be generated.

  Step S38a: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. Specifically, for the preceding value (for example, “BBH”) of the upper byte representing the type of command, a 1-word length in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte. A production command is generated. At this time, for the lower byte, the second place is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “result (change information) due to increase in number of working memories”. That is, if the lower byte is “01H”, it indicates that the current working memory number has become “01H” as a result of increasing by one from the previous working memory number “00H”. Similarly, if the lower byte is “02H” to “04H”, it is increased by one from the previous working memory numbers “01H” to “03H”, so that the current working memory number is “02H” to “02H”. 04H ". The preceding value “BBH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

  Step S39: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the first special symbol. This process is for transmitting the special figure destination determination effect command generated in the previous step S38, the effect command for increasing the number of working memories generated in step S38a, and the start opening winning tone control command to the effect control device 124. (Memory number notification means).

  When the above procedure is completed or the first special symbol operation memory number has reached 4 (step S30: No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28).

[Second special symbol memory update process]
Next, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the second special symbol memory update process (step S16 in FIG. 28). Hereinafter, the procedure of the second special symbol memory update process will be described in order.

  Step S40: The main control CPU 72 refers to the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter to check whether or not the working memory number is less than the maximum value. Similarly to the above, the second special symbol actuated memory number counter represents the number (number of sets) of jackpot determination random numbers and jackpot symbol random numbers stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76. At this time, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter reaches the maximum value (for example, 4) (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28). On the other hand, if the value of the second special symbol operation memory number counter is still less than the maximum value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to the next step S41 and thereafter.

  Step S41: The main control CPU 72 increments the second special symbol working memory number by one (increments the value of the second special symbol working memory number counter). Similarly to the previous step S31 (FIG. 29), the lighting state of the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a is controlled by the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27) based on the counter value added here. Will be.

  Step S42: The main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot determination random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the random number generator 75 through the sampling circuit 77 (acquisition of second lottery element, lottery element acquisition means). The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S32 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S43: Next, the main control CPU 72 acquires a jackpot symbol random number value corresponding to the second special symbol from the jackpot symbol random number counter area of the RAM 76. The method for acquiring the random value is the same as that in step S33 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S44: Also, the main control CPU 72 sequentially acquires a reach determination random number and a variation pattern determination random number regarding the variation condition of the second special symbol from the variation random number counter area of the RAM 76 (variation pattern determination element acquisition means). The acquisition of these random values is also performed in the same manner as step S34 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S45: The main control CPU 72 transfers the saved jackpot determination random number, jackpot symbol random number, reach determination random number, and variation pattern determination random number to the random number storage area corresponding to the second special symbol, and these random numbers in the empty section in the area To memorize as a set. The storage method is the same as step S35 (FIG. 29) described above.

  Step S45a: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the current game management status (game state) is a big hit. If it is not a big hit (No), the main control CPU 72 executes the following steps S46 and S47. Conversely, if it is a big hit (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips steps S46 and S47 and proceeds to step S48. The reason why this determination is made in the present embodiment is that the effect of pre-reading is not performed for the same incoming ball that occurred during the big hit.

  Step S46: When it is other than big hit (step S45a: No), next, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect determination process at the time of acquisition for the second special symbol. This process determines the result of the internal lottery in advance (before the start of the change) based on the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number of the second special symbol obtained in the previous steps S42 to S44, respectively, It is for judging. The specific processing contents will be described later.

  Step S47: After returning from the effect determination process at the time of acquisition, the main control CPU 72 sets the upper byte (for example, “B9H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command. This high-order byte data describes that the command type is “for special figure destination determination effect relating to the second special symbol”. Similarly, since the lower byte of the special figure destination determination effect command is set in the previous effect determination processing at the time of acquisition (step S46), for example, one word is synthesized by combining the upper byte with the lower byte. A long command will be generated.

  Step S48: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for increasing the number of working memories with respect to the second special symbol. Here, a one-word-length production command in which the increased number of working memories (for example, “01H” to “04H”) is added to the lower byte with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) representing the command type. Is generated. Similarly, for the second special symbol, the second place of the lower byte is set to “0” by default to indicate that the value is “a result of an increase in the number of working memories (change information)”. it can. The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is a working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S49: The main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output setting process for the second special symbol. As a result, preparation for transmitting a special figure destination determination effect command, an effect command when increasing the number of operating memories, a start opening winning sound control command, and the like regarding the second special symbol to the effect control device 124 is performed (memory number notifying means). . When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the switch input event process (FIG. 28).

[Acquisition process during acquisition]
FIG. 31 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure of an effect determination process at the time of acquisition. The main control CPU 72 performs this acquisition effect determination process in the first special symbol memory update process and the second special symbol memory update process (step S37 in FIG. 29, step S46 in FIG. 30) (predetermined determination). Execution means). As described above, this processing is executed for each of the first special symbol (when entering the middle start winning opening 26) and the second special symbol (when entering the variable start winning device 28). Therefore, the following description may correspond to a process related to the first special symbol and a process related to the second special symbol. Hereinafter, the contents of the processing will be described along each procedure.

  Step S50: The main control CPU 72 sets the lower byte (for example, “00H”) of the special figure destination determination effect command (point determination information). The byte data set here represents the standard value of the command (at the time of loss).

  Step S52: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot determination random number as the first determination random value. The random numbers to be loaded here are those stored in the RAM 76 in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 30). .

  Step S54: Then, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (here, the lower limit value or less) (lottery result destination determining means). Specifically, the main control CPU 72 sets a comparison value (lower limit value) in the A register, and subtracts the loaded random number value from this comparison value. The comparison value (lower limit value) is defined in advance according to the winning probability of the internal lottery in the pachinko machine 1. Next, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is 0 or a positive value from the value of the flag register, for example. As a result, if the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S80.

  Step S80: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a variation pattern information preliminary determination process at the time of deviation (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the variation pattern destination determination command described above for the variation time at the time of disconnection. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, prior determination information regarding the variation time (or variation pattern number) particularly when the “time reduction function” is activated is reflected. For example, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is activated, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “out-of-reach fluctuation fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)” based on the loaded reach determination random number. Judge whether there is. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “short-time / non-shortening fluctuation time”. In the case of reach variation, it is also possible to determine a “reach group (type of reach)” from the reach mode random number and generate a variation pattern destination determination command from the result. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to the “outlier reach fluctuation (non-shortening fluctuation time)”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to the “short / mid-shortening fluctuation time”. Alternatively, if the current state is when the “time reduction function” is inactive (low probability state), the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the “normally out of reach reach fluctuation” based on the loaded reach determination random number. It is determined whether or not. As a result, when the fluctuation time corresponds to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normally deviation reach fluctuation time”. On the other hand, when the fluctuation time does not correspond to “normally deviation reach fluctuation”, the main control CPU 72 generates a fluctuation pattern destination determination command corresponding to “normal deviation fluctuation time”. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above. In this process, the main control CPU 72 may generate a change pattern destination determination command for the change pattern at the time of the small hit, similarly to the process at the time of the above-described loss.

  When the above procedure is executed, the process returns to the caller's first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 28) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 29). On the other hand, if it is determined in the previous step S54 that the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but within the range (step S54: No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S56.

  Step S56: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set. The probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set when there is a winning value among the jackpot determination random numbers stored so far, although the fluctuation has not yet started. Specifically, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, if the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to “probability variation”, for example, the probability state schedule flag “A0H” is set. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a high probability state is to be set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the jackpot determined random number acquired after the jackpot determined random number. On the other hand, if there is a winning value in the jackpot decision random number stored so far, and the jackpot symbol random number paired with this corresponds to "non-probable (normal) symbol", the probability state For example, “01H” is set in the schedule flag. This value represents a flag value for setting as a schedule that a normal (low) probability state is set in advance determination (prefetching determination) of the big hit determination random number acquired after this big hit determination random number. If the winning value does not exist in the big hit determination random numbers stored so far, the flag value is reset (00H). Further, the value of the probability state schedule flag is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76, for example. Here, an example is given in which the advance hit determination is strictly performed using the “probability state schedule flag”. However, when the advance hit determination is simply performed based on the current probability state, step S56 and the subsequent steps are performed. Step S58, step S60, step S62, step S76, etc. may be omitted.

  If the probability state schedule flag has not yet been set (step S56: No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S66.

  Step S66: In this case, the main control CPU 72 sets the comparison value for the next low probability (normal time) in the A register. The low probability comparison value is also defined in advance according to the winning probability at the low probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  Step S68: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the “current probability state flag”. This probability state flag indicates whether or not the current internal state has a high probability (probably changing), and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. If the current probability state is a high probability (probably changing), the value “01H” is set as the state flag, and if the current probability state is low (normally), the value of the state flag is reset (“00H”). ").

  Step S70: Then, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded current special symbol probability state flag does not represent a high probability (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high probability (No Then, step S64 is executed.

  Step S64: The main control CPU 72 sets a comparative value for high probability. As a result, the low-probability comparison value set in the previous step S66 is rewritten. The high probability comparison value is defined in advance according to the winning probability at the high probability in the pachinko machine 1.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is not yet set and the current internal state is high probability, the comparison value is rewritten for high probability and the next step S72 is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S70 that the current probability state flag does not represent a high probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 skips step S64 and executes the next step S72.

  Step S72: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the random number loaded in the previous step S52 is out of the winning value range (lottery result destination determination means). That is, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the jackpot determination random number value from the comparison value set for each state. Similarly, the main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the calculation result is a negative value (<0) from the value of the flag register, and if the result is that the loaded random number is outside the range of the winning value (Yes) ), The main control CPU 72 executes the above-described variation pattern information preliminary determination process (step S80). On the other hand, if the loaded random number is not outside the range of the winning value but is within the range (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S74.

  Step S74: The main control CPU 72 executes a jackpot symbol type determination process. This process is for determining the big hit type (winning type) at that time based on the big hit symbol random number paired with the big hit decision random number. For example, the main control CPU 72 loads the jackpot symbol random number for each symbol stored in the first special symbol memory update process (step S35 in FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (step S45 in FIG. 30). Then, the calculation using the comparison value is executed in the same manner as in step S54 described above, and it is determined from the result whether the jackpot type corresponds to “non-probable variation (normal) symbol” or “probability variation symbol”. The main control CPU 72 stores the determination result at this time as a special symbol destination determination value, and proceeds to the next step S76.

  Step S76: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result. Specifically, when the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 represents “non-probable change (normal) symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “01H” in the probability state schedule flag. On the other hand, when the special symbol destination determination value represents “probability variation symbol”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value “A0H” in the probability state schedule flag. As a result, in the subsequent processing, it is determined that “flag set has been completed” in step S56.

  Step S78: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol destination determination value stored in the previous step S74 as the lower byte of the special symbol destination determination effect command. As the special symbol destination determination value, for example, “01H” is set when it corresponds to “non-probable (normal) symbol”, and “A0H” is set when it corresponds to “probable variation”. In any case, by setting the lower byte data here, the standard lower byte data “00H” set in the previous step S50 is rewritten.

  Step S79: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern information prior determination process (variation pattern destination determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates the above-described variation pattern destination determination command for the variation time at the big hit. In the variation pattern destination determination command generated here, for example, prior determination information related to the reach variation time (or variation pattern number) at the time of big hit is reflected. Further, the variation pattern destination determination command generated here is set in the transmission buffer in the effect command output setting process (steps S39 and S49) as described above.

  The above is the procedure before the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is set (before the internal first hit). On the other hand, when the probability state schedule flag is set through the previous step S76, the following procedure is executed. However, when the previous hit determination is performed only with the current probability state as described above, it is not necessary to execute the following step S56, step S58, step S60, step S62, and step S76.

  Step S56: When the main control CPU 72 confirms that a value has already been set in the probability state schedule flag (Yes), it next executes step S58.

  Step S58: The main control CPU 72 first sets a low probability (normal time) comparison value in the A register.

  Step S60: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads a “probability state schedule flag”. The probability state schedule flag is for setting a probability state in a subsequent determination based on the immediately preceding determination result as described above, and is stored in the flag area of the RAM 76. . If the probability state based on the immediately preceding destination determination result is scheduled to shift to a high probability (probability change), “A0H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag as described above. If the probability state based on is scheduled to return to a low probability (normal), “01H” is set as the value of the probability state schedule flag.

  Step S62: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the loaded probability state schedule flag does not represent a high-probability schedule (≠ 01H), and if the result indicates a high-probability schedule ( No) Next, step S64 is executed, and a comparative value for high probability is set.

  As described above, when the probability state schedule flag based on the previous determination result is already set and the value is a high probability, the next step S72 and subsequent steps after rewriting the comparison value for the high probability. Will be executed. On the other hand, when it is confirmed in the previous step S62 that the probability state schedule flag does not represent a schedule with a high probability but a schedule with a normal (low) probability (Yes), the main control CPU 72 performs a step. S64 is skipped and the subsequent step S72 and subsequent steps are executed. Thus, in the present embodiment, it is possible to make a prior jackpot determination in consideration of subsequent changes in internal state (normal probability state → high probability state, high probability state → normal probability state) based on the previous determination result. .

  When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the first special symbol memory update process (FIG. 29) or the second special symbol memory update process (FIG. 30).

[Special design game processing]
Next, the details of the special symbol game process executed in the interrupt management process (FIG. 27) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the special symbol game process. The special symbol game process includes an execution selection process (step S1000), a special symbol change pre-process (step S2000), a special symbol change process (step S3000), a special symbol stop display process (step S4000), and a bonus game variable winning device. This is a configuration including a subroutine (program module) group of a management process (step S5000) and a small winning time variable winning device management process (step S6000). First, the basic flow of the special symbol game process will be described along each process.

  Step S1000: In the execution selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects from the “jump table” the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S2000 to S6000). For example, the main control CPU 72 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the special symbol game process as the return address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination differs depending on the progress of the process performed so far (special symbol game management status). For example, if the special symbol has not yet started changing display (special symbol game management status: 00H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation pre-processing (step S2000) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the special symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed (special symbol game management status: 01H), the main control CPU 72 selects the special symbol variation processing (step S3000) as the next jump destination, and the special symbol variation is in progress. If the process has been completed (special symbol game management status: 02H), the special symbol stop displaying process (step S4000) is selected as the next jump destination. In this embodiment, the jump destination address is specified by the “jump table” and the process is selected. However, apart from such a selection method, a “process flag”, a “process selection flag”, or the like is used. There is also a known programming example in which the CPU selects a process to be executed next. In such a programming example, the CPU CALLs each process in a single way, and at the top step, the conditional branch (continuation / return) is performed with reference to the flag one by one. There is no need for the CPU 72 to call each process one by one.

  Step S2000: In the special symbol variation pre-processing, the main control CPU 72 performs an operation to prepare conditions for starting the variation display of the special symbol. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S3000: In the special symbol variation processing, the main control CPU 72 performs drive control of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 while counting the variation timer. Specifically, an ON or OFF drive signal (1 byte data) is output for each segment and dot (0th to 7th) of the 7-segment LED. The pattern of the drive signal changes with the passage of time, whereby a special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Step S4000: In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the drive of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Similarly, an ON or OFF drive signal is output for each segment and dot of the 7-segment LED. However, the pattern of the drive signal is constant, whereby a special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Step S5000: The jackpot variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a big-hit manner in the previous special symbol stop display process. For example, when a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a 10-round jackpot or 16-round jackpot mode, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to a jackpot gaming state (a special gaming state advantageous to the player) occurs. During the big hit game, the jump destination is set in the big win time variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the big win variable winning device management process, the first big winning opening solenoid 90 is set for a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds or until nine game balls are counted) for a predetermined number of continuous operations (for example, 10 times). The first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern (continuous operation of the special electric accessory). In addition, when 16 rounds are won, after the operation of the first variable prize winning device 30, the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is set for a certain period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds or 9 game balls are received). Until the ball is counted), it is excited for a preset number of continuous operations (for example, 6 times), whereby the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed in a predetermined pattern (operation of the special electric accessory). During this time, the game balls are intensively awarded to the first variable prize winning device 30 and the second variable prize winning device 31, thereby giving the player an opportunity to collect a lot of prize balls (special game). Execution means). The opening and closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 in the case of a big hit is called “round”, and if the total number of continuous operations is 16 times, these are called “16 rounds”. Sometimes referred to generically. In the present embodiment, the first variable winning device 30 is opened / closed from the first round to the 10th round, and the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed from the 11th round to the 16th round. In addition, in this embodiment, not only 16 round big hits but also 10 round big hits are provided as the types of big hits. For 16 round big hits and 10 round big hits, there are a plurality of winning types (winning symbols). ) May be provided.

  Further, when the main control CPU 72 sets a big winning opening opening pattern (number of rounds, number of opening / closing operations per round, opening time, etc.) in the big winning variable winning device management process, the first variable winning device 30 for one round is set. Alternatively, every time the opening / closing operation of the second variable winning device 31 is completed, the value of the round number counter is incremented by one. The value of the round number counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a round number command representing the value of the round number counter. The round number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). When the value of the round number counter reaches the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 ends the big hit game (big player) only for that round.

  When the big hit game ends, the main control CPU 72 changes the state after the big hit game (high probability state, time reduction state) based on the game state flag (probability variation function operation flag, time reduction function operation flag) ( High probability time shortening state transition means). In the “high probability state”, the probability variation function is activated, and the winning probability in the internal lottery becomes, for example, about ten times higher than usual (specific game state transition means, high probability state transition means, high probability state setting means). Further, in the “time reduction state”, the time reduction function is activated, and the normal symbol operation lottery has a high probability as described above, and the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened and the opening time of the variable start winning device 28 is reduced. Is extended and the number of times of opening increases (so-called electric Chu support is performed). Note that the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state” may be transferred to only one of them in terms of control, or may be transferred in accordance with both of them.

  Step S6000: The small winning hour variable winning device management process is selected when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the small winning manner in the special symbol stop display process. For example, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the small hit gaming state occurs. During the small hit game, the jump destination is set in the small hit prize variable winning device management process in the previous execution selection process (step S1000), and the special symbol variation display is not performed. In the small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) for a predetermined opening time (for example, 0.1 seconds), but most of the balls enter the first big prize opening. Does not occur.

[Multiple winning types]
In the present embodiment, for the above “10 round big hit”, for example, (1) “10 round normal (non-probable change) big win” and (2) “10 round positive change big win” are provided as a plurality of winning types. . In addition to “10 rounds big hit”, “16 rounds big hit” is provided. For example, (3) “16 rounds probable big hit 1”, (4) “16 rounds probable big hit 2”, (5 ) “16 rounds probable big hit 3” is provided. However, in this embodiment, jackpots other than 10 rounds and 16 rounds may be provided.

  The winning type corresponds to the type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is stopped and displayed at the time of winning. For example, “10 round normal jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round normal symbol”, and “10 round probability variable jackpot” corresponds to the jackpot of “10 round probability jackpot”. Further, “16 round probability variation jackpot 1” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, and “16 round probability variation jackpot 2” corresponds to the jackpot of “16 round probability variation symbol 2”. Further, “16 round probability variation big hit 3” corresponds to big hit of “16 round probability variation big hit 3”. Therefore, hereinafter, the “winning type” will be appropriately referred to as “winning symbol”.

[10 round normal design]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round normal symbols”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. For this reason, in the “10 round normal symbol” jackpot game, 10 rounds of winning balls (prize balls) are given to the player. The first grand prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) have occurred in one round. In this case, since the “probability changing function” is not activated, the privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is not given to the player. However, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the privilege to shift to the “time reduction state” can be obtained by operating the “time reduction function” after the big hit game ends. Granted to a person.

[10-round probable design]
In the special symbol stop display processing described above, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “10 round probability variation symbol”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game execution means) . In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The big hit game of “10 rounds probable change symbol” also gives the player 10 balls (prize balls) for 10 rounds. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 rounds probabilistic pattern 1]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. The remaining 11th to 16th rounds of the second variable prize winning device 31 of the second variable prize winning device 31 are shorter in time (0.1 second opening time) than the 1st to 10th rounds. Mouth open once. Therefore, the 10th to 16th rounds of the jackpot game of “16 round probability variation pattern 1” are terminated without giving a substantial play (prize ball) to the player. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 rounds probable variation 1” gives the player about 10 rounds (prize balls). Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16 round probability variation 2]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 2”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. In addition, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 9 times = 9 game balls) has been won within one round, the second big prize opening is closed without waiting for the longest opening time to elapse. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

[16-round probability variation 3]
In the above special symbol stop display process, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the form of “16 round probability variation 3”, an opportunity to shift from the normal state until then to the big hit gaming state occurs (special game executing means) ). In this case, the first grand opening is opened once for a sufficiently long time from the first round (for example, a maximum opening time of 29.0 seconds), and this continues until the tenth round. Then, the second big prize opening of the second variable prize winning device 31 is opened once each over a sufficiently long time (for example, the opening time of 29.0 seconds at the longest) from the 11th round, which is 16 rounds. Continue to eyes. For this reason, the big hit game of “16 round probability variation 2” gives the player 16 balls (prize balls) for the game. Then, for example, by operating the “probability changing function” after the big hit game is finished, a privilege to shift to the “high probability state” is given to the player as a result. Also, in this case, even if the “time reduction function” is inactive in the previous game, the “time reduction function” is activated after the big hit game is completed, and the time is shifted to “time reduction state”. The privilege to be given is given to the player.

  Here, “16-round probability variation 2” and “16-round probability variation symbol 3” are both common in that 16 rounds of play balls (prize balls) are given to the player. In the case of “symbol 2”, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds), whereas it corresponds to “16th round probability variation 3” In this case, the difference is that the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds is set to be relatively short (for example, about 2 to 2.5 seconds, which is the same as other interval times). The reason for securing a longer interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16 round probability variation 2” is to secure the stage of the round continuation judge production (treasure challenge production). Because.

  In any case, if the winning symbol is one of the above “10-round probability variation symbol”, “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the big hit game ends. The player is given a privilege to shift the internal state to the “high probability state” later. In the “high probability state”, an internal lottery is won, and the winning symbol at that time is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. If any of the above is true, the “high probability state” continues (restarts) after the jackpot game ends. On the other hand, if the internal lottery is won in the “high probability state” and the above “10 round normal symbol” is met, the internal state returns to the normal probability state (low probability state) after the big hit game ends. Needless to say, if the internal lottery is won in the normal probability state and it falls under “10 round normal symbol”, the internal state is maintained in the normal probability state even after the big hit game ends.

[Small hits]
Further, in the present embodiment, small wins are provided as winning types other than non-winning. When winning a small hit, a small hit game is performed separately from the big hit game, and the first variable winning device 30 is opened and closed (special game execution means). That is, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a small hit state in the special symbol stop display process, the small hit game (the first variable winning device 30 is activated in the normal probability state or the high probability state). (In this embodiment, no small hit is set for the second special symbol). In such a small hit game, the first variable winning device 30 opens and closes a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), but hardly enters the first big winning opening. In addition, even if the small hit game ends, the “probability variation function” does not operate, and the “time reduction function” does not operate, so the “probability state” or “time reduction state” The privilege to be transferred is not granted (it is not a prerequisite for that). Also, even if you win a small hit in the “high probability state”, the “high probability state” will not end after the small hit game ends. The “time reduction state” does not end after the winning game ends (except when the upper limit is reached). In the present embodiment, the game specification for setting a small hit is used, but it may be a game specification for not setting a small hit.

[Special symbol change pre-treatment]
FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a procedure for special symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2100: First, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the first special symbol working memory number or the second special symbol working memory number remains (greater than 0). This confirmation can be made with reference to the value of the working memory number counter stored in the RAM 76. When the number of working memories of both the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 executes a demonstration setting process in step S2500.

  Step S2500: In this process, the main control CPU 72 generates a demonstration effect command. The demonstration effect command is output to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). When the demo setting process is executed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. At the time of return, it returns to the end address as described above (and so on).

  On the other hand, if the value of the working memory number counter of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2200.

  Step S2200: The main control CPU 72 executes a special symbol storage area shift process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 preferentially reads out the lottery random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number) stored in the random number storage area of the RAM 76, which corresponds to the second special symbol. At this time, if random numbers are stored in two or more sections, the main control CPU 72 reads and erases (consumes) the random numbers in order from the first section, and then moves (shifts) the remaining random numbers one by one to the previous section. ) The read random number is stored, for example, in another temporary storage area. When the random number corresponding to the second special symbol is not stored, the main control CPU 72 reads the random number corresponding to the first special symbol and stores it in the temporary storage area. Each random number stored in the temporary storage area is used for internal lottery in the next jackpot determination process. As a result, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially performed over the first special symbol. In addition, the program which reads a random number in the order memorize | stored simply may be sufficient, without providing the priority order according to such special symbols. Further, in this process, the main control CPU 72 subtracts one value of the working memory number counter (the one of the first special symbol or the second special symbol which has been subjected to the random number shift) stored in the RAM 76, and after the subtraction Is set to “Number of working memories at start of change”. Thereby, the display mode of the number stored by the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a or the second special symbol operation memory lamp 35a changes (decreases by 1) in the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27). . When the procedure so far is finished, the main control CPU 72 then executes step S2300.

  Step S2300: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit determination process (internal lottery). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first sets a range of the big hit value and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (internal lottery execution means). The range of the jackpot value set at this time is different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated). In the high probability state, the range of the jackpot value is expanded to about 10 times that of the normal probability state. The If the random value read at this time is included in the range of the big hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit flag (01H), and then proceeds to step S2400.

  When the above big hit flag is not set, the main control CPU 72 sets the range of the small hit value next in the same big hit determination process, and determines whether or not the read random number value is included in this range (lottery execution). means). The “small hit” here is other than non-winning (out of), but is different from “big hit”. That is, “big hit” generates an opportunity (game milestone) to shift to the above “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, but “small hit” does not generate such an opportunity. However, “small hit” is positioned as satisfying the condition for operating the first variable winning device 30 as in “big hit”. The range of the small hit value set at this time may be different between the normal probability state and the high probability state (when the probability variation function is activated), or may be the same. In any case, if the read random number value is included in the range of the small hit value, the main control CPU 72 sets the small hit flag, and then proceeds to step S2400. As described above, in the present embodiment, as the hit range corresponding to other than the non-winning, the range of the big hit value and the small hit value is defined in advance in the program. Each of them may be written in the ROM 74, read out, and the big hit determination may be performed while comparing with the random value.

  Step S2400: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set for the big hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the jackpot flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2402.

  Step S2402: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not a value (01H) is set in the small hit flag in the previous big hit determination process. If the value (01H) is not set in the small hit flag (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S2404. The main control CPU 72 may determine the big hit (for example, 01H is set) or the small hit (for example, 0AH is set) according to the value of the common hit flag without separately preparing the big hit flag and the small hit flag.

  Step S2404: The main control CPU 72 executes an off-time stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets stop symbol number data at the time of disconnection by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of losing) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  In this embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is used for the first special symbol display device 34 and the second special symbol display device 35, for example, the display mode of the stop symbol at the time of disconnection is always set to one segment (the center It is possible to fix the stop symbol number data to one value (for example, 64H) by keeping only the lighting display of the bar "-"). In this case, the storage capacity used in the program can be reduced, the processing load on the main control CPU 72 can be reduced, and the processing speed can be improved.

  Step S2405: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a deviation variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the fluctuation pattern number at the time of deviation for the special symbol (fluctuation pattern selection means). The variation pattern number is used to distinguish the variation display type (pattern) of the special symbol or to correspond to the variation time required for the variation display. Since the fluctuation time at the time of loss differs depending on whether or not it is the above “time reduction state”, in this process, the main control CPU 72 loads the gaming state flag and the current state is “time reduction state”. Check if it exists. In the “time reduction state”, except for the case where reach fluctuation is basically performed, the fluctuation time at the time of disconnection is set to a shortened time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) (shortening fluctuation time determination means) ). In addition, even if not in the “time shortening state”, the fluctuation time at the time of losing is based on, for example, “the number of operating memories at the start of fluctuation display (0 to 3)” set in step S2200, except when the reach fluctuation occurs. (For example, the number of working memories at the start of variable display 0 to about 12.5 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 1 to about 8 seconds, the number of operating memories at the start of variable display 2 to 5 → About 3 seconds, the number of working memories at the start of variable display is 3 → 2.5 seconds). Note that the symbol stop display time at the time of disconnection is constant (for example, about 0.5 seconds) regardless of the variation pattern. The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined fluctuation time (at the time of disconnection) in the fluctuation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time at the time of disconnection in the stop symbol display timer.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery is a non-winning result, for example, a “reach effect” is generated and the control is performed so that the “reach effect” is not generated. It is said. The “variation pattern selection table at the time of loss” preliminarily defines variation patterns corresponding to a plurality of types of effects such as “non-reach effect” and “reach effect”. One of the fluctuation patterns is selected from the inside. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like.

[Example of variation pattern selection table for loss]
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability non-time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability non-time shortened state (in the case of non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “1” to “8” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Fluctuation pattern numbers “1” to “5” correspond to fluctuation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and fluctuation pattern numbers “6” to “8” are fluctuation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “7” and “8” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. The variation pattern selection table may have different table contents depending on the number of operation memories at the start of variation (the same applies hereinafter).

  Here, the length of the set fluctuation time is greatly different between the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern. That is, the “non-reach fluctuation pattern” basically corresponds to a short fluctuation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds to 13.0 seconds depending on the number of working memories), whereas the “reach fluctuation pattern” This corresponds to a long fluctuation time (for example, about 30 seconds to 150 seconds) more than twice as long.

  Then, the main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, The corresponding variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determining means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “2” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the low probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (variation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “21” to “28” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  Variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing a reach effect, and variation pattern numbers “26” to “28” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “27” and “28” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. On the other hand, since the variation pattern numbers “21” to “25” are non-reach variations due to time shortening variations, a shortened variation time (for example, about 2.0 seconds) is set as the variation time in the normal state. .

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “22” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a variation pattern selection table at the time of loss (high probability time shortened state).
This selection table is a table that is used at the time of losing in the high probability time shortened state (when it corresponds to non-winning) (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “41” to “48” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “41” to “45” correspond to variation patterns that are out of reach without performing the reach effect, and the variation pattern numbers “46” to “48” are variation patterns that are out of reach after reaching. It corresponds. Among these, the fluctuation pattern numbers “47” and “48” correspond to fluctuation patterns (fluctuation patterns satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that are lost after super reach. On the other hand, fluctuation pattern numbers “41” to “45” are fluctuation times that are extremely shortened as the fluctuation time in the normal state (for example, about 0.5 seconds) in order to realize high-speed fluctuation in the high probability time reduction state. Is set.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “42” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
The above steps S2404 and S2405 are control procedures when the big hit determination result is out of place (in the case other than non-winning), but the determination result is a big hit (step S2400: Yes) or a small hit (step S2402: Yes). The main control CPU 72 executes the following procedure. First, the case of jackpot will be described.

  Step S2410: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit stop symbol determination process (winning type determination means). In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of the winning symbol (stop symbol number at the time of jackpot) for each special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) based on the jackpot symbol random number. The relationship between the jackpot symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol is defined in advance in the special symbol determination data table (winning type defining means). For this reason, the main control CPU 72 can determine the type of winning symbol based on the big hit symbol random number from the stored contents by referring to the big hit symbol stop selection table in the big hit symbol stop determination process.

[Winning pattern at the time of big hit]
In the present embodiment, there are five types of winning symbols that are selectively determined at the time of a big hit. The five types of breakdown are “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. Each of the five types of winning symbols may further include a plurality of winning symbols. For example, “16 round probability variation 1”, “16 round probability variation 1a”, “16 round probability variation 1b”, “16 round probability variation 1c”, and so on.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, the selection ratio of the winning symbol selected at the time of the big winning of the internal lottery corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is different. For this reason, the main control CPU 72 distinguishes the winning symbol to be selected depending on whether the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol or the second special symbol.

[First Special Symbol Big Stop Stop Symbol Selection Table]
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. When the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 refers to the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) to determine the type of the winning symbol.

  In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the left column shows the distribution value by winning symbol, and each distribution value “30”, “50”, “15”, “5” is the denominator. Is equivalent to the ratio when 100 is 100. In the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the time of the big hit corresponding to the first special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is 100 minutes. Of 50 (= 50%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 15/100 (= 15%), and the ratio that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. The size of each distribution value corresponds to the selection ratio for each winning symbol using a jackpot symbol random number. Therefore, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol for the first special symbol as a whole is 70%. In the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the allocation value for “16 round probability variation 3” is not set.

  In any case, if the current jackpot result corresponds to the first special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the jackpot symbol random number, and the selection ratio shown in the first special symbol jackpot stop symbol selection table To select the winning symbol selectively. Further, in the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as a stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. The stop symbol command is described by, for example, a combination of MODE value-EVENT value, and among these, the MODE value “B1H” of the upper byte is selected when the winning symbol of this time is the big hit of the first special symbol. Represents. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, and “04H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the first special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command at the time of winning is described as “B1H02H” It will be.

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the first special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the first special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions (limit number) given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the number of time reductions is given 100 times. In addition, in the case of any of “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, or “16 round probability variation symbol 2”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times.

[2nd special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table]
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a configuration column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table. The main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol with reference to the second special symbol big-hit stop symbol selection table (winning type defining means) when the result of the big jackpot corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Also in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the distribution value for each winning symbol is shown in the left column, and each allocation value is “30”, “10”, “5”, “5”. , “50” corresponds to the ratio when the denominator is 100. Similarly, in the second column from the left, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” and “16” corresponding to each distribution value are displayed. Round probability variation 3 "is shown. That is, at the big hit corresponding to the second special symbol, the ratio of selecting “10 round normal symbol” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the rate of selecting “10 round probability variable symbol” is It is 10/100 (= 10%). In addition, the ratio that “16 round probability variation 1” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%), and the proportion that “16 round probability variation 2” is selected is 5/100 (= 5%). is there. Furthermore, the ratio at which “16 round probability variation 3” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). Therefore, also for the second special symbol, the selection ratio of the probability variation symbol as a whole is 70%.

  When the result of this big hit corresponds to the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 performs a selection lottery based on the big hit symbol random number, and selects the winning symbol with the selection ratio shown in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table To decide. Similarly, in the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, for example, 2-byte command data is defined as the stop symbol command at the time of winning as shown in the third column from the left. Again, the stop symbol command is described by the combination of the above MODE value-EVENT value. Among these, the MODE value “B2H” of the upper byte is the one selected when the winning symbol of the second special symbol is the current winning symbol. It represents that. Further, the EVENT values “01H”, “02H”, “03H”, “04H”, and “05H” in the lower byte represent the types of winning symbols corresponding in the selection table. Therefore, for example, if the result of the big hit this time corresponds to the second special symbol, and “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the stop symbol command will be described as “B2H02H”. .

  As described above, when the selected symbol is selected from the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command at that time. The generated stop symbol command is transmitted to the effect control device 124, for example, in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). Further, the main control CPU 72 determines a big hit stop symbol number for the second special symbol based on the selected winning symbol.

[Time reduction]
In the right column of the second special symbol big hit stop symbol selection table, the value of the number of time reductions given after the end of the big hit game is shown.
In the present embodiment, in the case of “16 round probability variation 3”, the number of time reductions is given 10,000 times. The other time reduction times are the same as in the case of a big hit with the first special symbol.

  Note that the selection ratio of the winning symbol differs between the first special symbol and the second special symbol as described above, for example, for the following reason. That is, when shifting to the “high probability state” or “time shortening state”, the variable start winning device 28 operates more frequently than in the normal time (when the time shortening function is not in operation). The working memory for the second special symbol is more easily accumulated than the working memory for. In this case, if you raise the selection ratio of “3 per 16 rounds probable big change” for the second special symbol, it will be easier to win “3 per 16 rounds probable big hit” than usual, so that will increase the player's profit accordingly This is because there is an advantage of being able to.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2412: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 changes the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number moved (shifted) to the top section of the RAM 76 in the previous step S2200. ). The main control CPU 72 sets the value of the determined variation time in the variation timer, and sets the value of the stop display time in the stop symbol display timer. In general, in the case of big hit reach fluctuation, a fluctuation time longer than that at the time of loss is determined.

  In the present embodiment, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to a big hit of 10 rounds or a big hit of 16 rounds, for example, a “reach effect” is generated to produce a big hit. In the “big hit variation pattern selection table”, variation patterns corresponding to multiple types of “reach effects” are defined. A variation pattern will be selected. The reach production includes various reach production such as normal reach production, long reach production, super reach production, and the like. Also, when winning with the time shortening function activated, a variation pattern with a short variation time (a variation pattern without a reach effect) may be selected without selecting a variation pattern with a long variation time. Good.

[Example of big hit fluctuation pattern selection table]
FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability non-time reduced state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability non-time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In the present embodiment, the variation patterns are not distinguished for the 10-round big hit and the 16-round big hit, but a dedicated variation pattern selection table may be used for each big hit (the same applies hereinafter). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “61” to “68” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “61” to “68” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “61” to “66” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “62” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (low probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the low probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. “81” to “88” of “variation pattern number” are assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “81” to “88” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “81” to “86” correspond to the variation pattern (a variation pattern that satisfies a specific reach occurrence condition) that is a hit after super reach.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “82” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of the big hit hour variation pattern selection table (high probability time reduction state).
This selection table is a table used at the time of winning in the high probability time shortened state (fluctuation pattern defining means). In addition, this selection table has a structure in which, for example, “comparison value” and “variation pattern number” are stored as a set of 1 byte each in order from the head address. The “comparison value” includes, for example, eight different values “101”, “201”, “211”, “221”, “231”, “241”, “251”, “255 (FFH)”. The “variation pattern number” “101” to “108” is assigned to each “comparison value”.

  The variation pattern numbers “101” to “108” all correspond to the variation pattern that is a hit when the reach effect is performed. Among these, the variation pattern numbers “101” to “106” correspond to the variation pattern (variation pattern satisfying a specific reach occurrence condition) that is hit after super reach. Note that when winning in the high probability time shortening state, a variation pattern that is a hit may be set without a reach effect.

  The main control CPU 72 sequentially compares the obtained variation pattern determination random value with the “comparison value” in the variation pattern selection table, and if the random value is equal to or less than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 corresponds to the comparison value. A variation pattern number is selected (variation pattern determination means). For example, if the variation pattern determination random value at that time is “190”, the main control CPU 72 determines that the random value exceeds the comparison value when compared with the first comparison value “101”. 201 "is compared with the random value. In this case, since the random value is equal to or smaller than the comparison value, the main control CPU 72 selects “102” as the corresponding variation pattern number.

[See Figure 33: Special symbol change pre-processing]
Step S2414: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a big hit other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines that the type of winning symbol (hit stop symbol number) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or In the case of any one of “16 round probability variation symbols 3”, the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (high probability state setting means). Further, when the type of winning symbol determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, the main control CPU 72 resets the value of the probability variation function operation flag as a gaming state flag (low probability state setting means). .

  Further, the main control CPU 72 determines that the winning symbol type (stop symbol number at the time of big hit) determined in the previous step S2410 is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 In the case of either “Round Probability Variation 2” or “16 Round Probability Variation 3”, the main control CPU 72 sets the value (01H) of the time reduction function operation flag as a gaming state flag in the flag area of the RAM 76 (time reduction state) Transition means, time shortening function actuating means).

  In the process of step S2414, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (big hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the big hit time stop symbol number. At the same time, the main control CPU 72 generates a lottery result command (at the time of the big hit) together with the stop symbol command (at the time of the big hit). These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

Next, processing for small hits will be described.
Step S2407: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hit stop symbol determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the type of winning symbol at the time of small hit (stop symbol number at small hit) based on the big hit symbol random number. Similarly, the relationship between the big winning symbol random number value and the type of winning symbol at the time of small hitting is preliminarily defined in the special symbol selection table at small hitting (winning type defining means). In this embodiment, in order to reduce the load on the main control CPU 72, the winning symbol at the time of the small hit is determined using the big hit symbol random number, but a dedicated random number may be used separately.

[Winning pattern for small hits]
In the present embodiment, the winning symbol at the time of small hitting is only one type of “twice open small hitting symbol”. However, other types such as “one time opening small hit symbol” and “three times opening small hit symbol” may be prepared. As described above, “small hit” as a result of the internal lottery is not an opportunity for the subsequent state to change to “high probability state” or “time reduction state”, and thus is essential for this type of pachinko machine. A “one-time small hit symbol” can be provided without being bound by the definition of “two rounds (two times open) or more”.

  Step S2408: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hit hour variation pattern determination process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 changes the variation pattern (variation time and stop display time) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol based on the variation pattern determination random number moved (shifted) to the top section of the RAM 76 in the previous step S2200. ) Is determined (variation pattern selection means). Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the determined variation time value in the variation timer, and sets the stop display time value in the stop symbol display timer. In the present embodiment, the reach variation pattern can be selected in the case of a small hit, or a variation pattern equivalent to that in the normal variation can be selected.

  Step S2409: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting and other setting process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the display mode of the stop symbol (small hit symbol) by the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35 based on the stop symbol number at the time of small hit. In addition, the main control CPU 72 generates a stop symbol command and a lottery result command (at the time of a small hit) to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. These stop symbol commands and lottery result commands are also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  Step S2415: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes special symbol variation start processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 selects the fluctuation pattern data based on the fluctuation pattern number (out of time / hit). At the same time, the main control CPU 72 sets a special symbol variation start flag in the flag area of the RAM 76. Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a change start command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. This variation start command is also transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol changing process (step S3000) as the next jump destination and returns to the special symbol game process.

[Fig. 32: Special symbol change processing, special symbol stop display processing]
In the special symbol fluctuation processing, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the fluctuation timer from the register to the timer counter as described above, and then the timer according to the passage of time (clock pulse count number or interrupt counter value). Decrement the counter value. Then, while referring to the value of the timer counter, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol variation display as described above until the value becomes zero. When the value of the timer counter becomes 0, the main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol stop display in-progress process (step S4000) as the next jump destination.

  In the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 controls the special symbol stop display based on the stop symbol determined in the stop symbol determination process (steps S2404, S2407, and S2410 in FIG. 33). The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command to be transmitted to the effect control device 124. The symbol stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). When the stop symbol is displayed for a predetermined time in the special symbol stop display process, the main control CPU 72 deletes the symbol changing flag.

[Special symbol memory area shift processing]
FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol storage area shift process. In the previous special symbol variation pre-processing, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is greater than “0” (step S2100: Yes in FIG. 33), the main control CPU 72 Executes this special symbol storage area shift process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S2210: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol that is preferentially consumed is “0”. At this time, if the value of the operation memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “1” or more (No), the main control CPU 72 then proceeds to step S2212.

  Step S2212: The main control CPU 72 designates the second special symbol as a special symbol for shifting the storage area. This designation is performed, for example, by setting “02H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2214: On the other hand, when the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol is “0” (step S2210: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the first special symbol as a special symbol to be shifted in the storage area. Is specified. The designation in this case is performed, for example, by setting “01H” as the target symbol designation value.

  Step S2216: The main control CPU 72 shifts the random number storage area of the RAM 76 for the target special symbol designated in either step S2212 or step S2214. The details of the specific processing are as already described in the previous special symbol change pre-processing.

  Step S2218: Next, the main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the operation memory counter for the target special symbol. For example, if the target to shift the current storage area is the second special symbol, the main control CPU 72 subtracts (-1) the value of the working memory counter corresponding to the second special symbol.

  Step S2220: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “the number of operation memories at the start of fluctuation” from the value of the operation memory counter after the subtraction. Here, for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the value of the operation memory counter may be added and the “number of operation memories at the start of change” may be set.

Step S2222: Further, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the special symbol to be shifted in the current storage area is the second special symbol.
Step S2224: When the target is the second special symbol (step S2222: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the working command when the number of working memories is reduced for the second special symbol. The effect command set here is also generated as a one-word-length command, but its structure is in contrast to the above-described “effect command when increasing the number of working memories”. That is, the production command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is lower than the value of lower bytes (for example, “00H” to “03H” that represents the number of working memories after reduction with respect to the preceding value (for example, “BCH”) of the upper bytes representing the command type )) And an additional value (for example, “10H”) meaning “decrease in the number of working memories accompanying consumption” is further added (logical sum) to the lower byte value. Therefore, for the lower byte, the second value becomes “1” by ORing the added value “10H”, and this value represents “the result (change information) due to the decrease in the number of working memories”. It will be a thing. In other words, if the lower byte of the command is “13H”, it means that the number of working memories up to the previous time “4” (command notation is “14H”) is reduced by one, so that the number of working memories this time is “3” (command The notation is “13H”). Similarly, if the lower byte is “12H” to “10H”, it means that the number of working memories “3” to “1” up to the previous time (command notation is “13H” to “11H”) is decreased by one respectively. This indicates that the current operation memory number is “2” to “0” (command notation is “12H” to “10H”). The preceding value “BCH” is a value indicating that the current effect command is the working memory number command for the second special symbol.

  Step S2226: If the current target is the first special symbol (Step S2222: No), the main control CPU 72 sets an effect command for reducing the number of working memories regarding the first special symbol. The command in this case is the same as the above except that the preceding value is a value (for example, “BBH”) indicating that the previous value is the working memory number command for the first special symbol.

Step S2228: Then, the main control CPU 72 executes an effect command output process. This process is for transmitting the production command for reducing the number of working memories set in the previous step S2224 or step S2226 to the production control device 124 (memory number notification means).
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol variation pre-processing (FIG. 33).

[Special symbol stop display processing]
Next, FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the special symbol stop display process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S4100: The main control CPU 72 subtracts the value of the stop symbol display timer (decrements by the interrupt period).

  Step S4200: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the stop display time has ended based on the value of the stop symbol display timer subtracted this time. Specifically, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is not 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has not yet ended (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process, jumps from the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32), and repeatedly executes the special symbol stop display process in the next interrupt cycle.

  On the other hand, if the value of the stop symbol display timer is 0 or less, the main control CPU 72 determines that the stop display time has ended (Yes). In this case, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4250.

  Step S4250: The main control CPU 72 generates a symbol stop command and a stop display time end command. The symbol stop command and the stop display time end command are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25). In addition, the main control CPU 72 erases the symbol changing flag here. The “stop display time end command” is a command indicating that the stop display time of the special symbol has ended (elapsed).

  Step S4300: Here, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set. When the value of the big hit flag (01H) is set (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4350.

[When winning]
Step S4350: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination of the jump table to “big winning variable winning device management process”. The main control CPU 72 executes processing for setting various functions to non-operation in this processing. Specifically, the probability variation function is deactivated and the time reduction function is deactivated. Thereby, before the special game (big player) is started, the state is shifted to the low probability non-time shortening state.

  Step S4400: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “start of big role (during big hit game)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 sets the value of the continuous operation number status according to the type of jackpot symbol. For example, when the type of the jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, a value corresponding to “10 round” is set in the continuous operation count status. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the value indicating “16 rounds” is set in the continuous operation count status. The Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that the big hit. The state command representing the big hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  Step S4500: The main control CPU 72 generates a continuous operation number command. The continuous operation number command can be generated based on the type of big hit symbol (stop symbol number) determined in the previous big hit time stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 33). For example, when the type of jackpot symbol is “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “10 rounds”. When the type of jackpot symbol is “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3”, the continuous operation number command is generated as a value representing “16 rounds”. . The generated continuous operation number command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  When the above procedure is completed at the time of the big hit, the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process.

[When not winning]
On the other hand, the following procedure is executed in cases other than the big hit.
That is, if the main control CPU 72 determines in step S4300 that the value of the big hit flag (01H) is not set (No), it next executes step S4600.

  Step S4600: The main control CPU 72 next checks whether or not the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set. If the value of the small hit flag (01H) is not set and is simply shifted (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4602.

  Step S4602: The main control CPU 72 sets the special symbol variation pre-processing address as the jump destination address of the jump table.

  Step S4605: On the other hand, if the value of the small hit flag (01H) is set (step S4600: Yes), the main control CPU 72 uses the address of the variable winning prize management device processing at the small hit as the jump destination address of the jump table. set.

  Step S4606: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets “small hit start (during small hit)” as an internal state flag for control. Further, the main control CPU 72 generates a status command indicating that a small hit is being made. The state command representing the small hit is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the sub-command transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  Step 4610: Next, the main control CPU 72 loads the value of the count-down counter. In the “counting counter”, the counter values are set in the probability variation count area and the time reduction count area of the RAM 76 in the “high probability state” and the “time reduction state”. In this case, “number of times cut” is used, but the value of the number of times counter in the “high probability state” can be set to an extremely large value (for example, 10,000 times or more). By setting such an enormous value, it is possible to probabilistically guarantee that the “high probability state” will continue until the next winning is substantially obtained. In the case where there is only a single “time reduction state” instead of the “high probability state”, the count-off counter is set to a standard numerical value (for example, 100 times).

  Step S4620: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the loaded counter value is zero. At this time, if the count-down counter value is already 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, when the count cut counter value is not 0 (No), after generating the count cut counter value command, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S4630.

Step S4630: The main control CPU 72 decrements (subtracts 1) the count-down counter value.
Step S4640: The main control CPU 72 determines whether or not the subtraction result is not zero. As a result of the subtraction, when the value of the number cut counter is not 0 (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the special symbol game process. On the other hand, if the value of the number cut counter becomes 0 (No), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S4650.

  Step S4650: Here, the main control CPU 72 resets a flag at the time of turning off the number of times function. The probability variable function operation flag or the time shortening function operation flag is reset, but since the value of the count counter is not zero in the “high probability state” as described above, it is practical. It is the time reduction function activation flag that is reset above. Thereby, the time shortening state and the high probability state are ended through the special symbol stop display. When the above procedure is completed, the process returns to the special symbol game process.

[Display output management processing]
Next, FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the display output management process (step S210 in FIG. 27) executed in the interrupt management process. The display output management process includes a special symbol display setting process (step S1200), a normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), a state display setting process (step S1220), an operation memory display setting process (step S1230), and a continuous operation number display setting. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S1240).

  Among these, the special symbol display setting process (step S1200), the normal symbol display setting process (step S1210), and the operation memory display setting process (step S1230) are the first special symbol display device 34, the second, as already described. Generates drive signals to be applied to the LEDs of the special symbol display device 35, the normal symbol display device 33, the normal symbol operation memory lamp 33a, the first special symbol operation memory lamp 34a, and the second special symbol operation memory number display lamp 35a. And output processing.

  The state display setting process (step S1220) and the continuous operation number display setting process (step S1240) are processes for generating and outputting a drive signal to be applied to each LED of the gaming state display device 38. First, in the state display setting process, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the probability variation state display lamp 38d and the short time state display lamp 38e, respectively, according to the value of the probability variation function activation flag or the time reduction function activation flag. For example, if the value (01H) is set in the probability variation function operation flag when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the probability variation state display lamp 38d. The probability variation state display lamp 38d continues to be lit until the jackpot game related to the special symbol is started or until the probability variation function is turned off after the special symbol variation display has been performed a predetermined number of times. The display can be switched (off). On the other hand, if the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 turns on the lighting signal for the LED corresponding to the time reduction state display lamp 38e regardless of whether or not the power is turned on. Is output. Further, the main control CPU 72 controls the lighting of the launch position designation lamp 38f in accordance with the special game management status. For example, when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is activated due to the big hit game or the small hit game, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f. . If the value (01H) is set in the time reduction function operation flag, the main control CPU 72 gives a lighting signal to the LED corresponding to the launch position designation lamp 38f in addition to the above-mentioned time reduction state display lamp 38e. Output. Note that the launch position designation lamp 38f is turned on from the start of the big hit game until the end of the "time reduced state" when the game is shifted to the "time reduced state" through the big hit game, and is not turned on when the "time reduced state" ends ( OFF).

  The main control CPU 72 controls lighting of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b in the continuous operation number display setting process. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal for one of the big hit type display lamps 38a and 38b based on the value of the above-mentioned continuous operation number status. At this time, one of the display lamps 38a and 38b corresponding to the jackpot symbol designated by the value of the continuous operation number status is the target of outputting the lighting signal. For example, if the value of the continuous operation number status designates “10 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38 a representing “10 rounds (10R)”. Further, if the value of the continuous operation count status specifies “16 rounds”, the main control CPU 72 outputs a lighting signal to the lamp 38b representing “16 rounds (16R)”.

[Variable winning device management process for big hits]
Next, details of the big win variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a configuration example of the big win variable winning device management process. The jackpot variable winning device management process includes a jackpot gaming process selection process (step S5100), a jackpot big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S5200), a jackpot big winning opening / closing operation process (step S5300), and a big hit big This is a configuration including a subroutine group of a winning opening closing process (step S5400) and a big hit end process (step S5500).

  Step S5100: In the big hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S5200 to S5500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the big win variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 has not been started yet, the main control CPU 72 sets the big hit time big winning opening opening pattern setting process as the next jump destination. (Step S5200) is selected. On the other hand, if the big hit special prize opening pattern setting process has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the big hit special prize opening / closing operation processing (step S5300) as the next jump destination, and the big hit special prize opening / closing operation is performed. If the operation process has been completed, the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process and the big hit big prize opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations (number of rounds), the main control CPU 72 performs the big hit end process ( Step S5500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big prize opening pattern setting process for big hits]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning opening big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is opened / closed and the time of each opening at the time of a big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S5204: The main control CPU 72 executes a design-specific release pattern selection process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 determines the winning pattern opening pattern (number of times of opening for each round and the time of each opening), the interval time between rounds, and the number of counts in one round (maximum) according to the current winning symbol. Set the number of winnings). Note that the opening pattern for each winning symbol is as described in the item “plurality of winning types” in the special symbol game process (FIG. 32). The interval time between rounds is any one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1”, “16 round probability variable symbol 2” or “16 round probability variable symbol 3”. However, it is set to about 2 seconds to 2.5 seconds, for example. However, the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds in the case of “16-round probability variation 1” or “16-round probability variation 2” is the scale for the continuous round judgment production (treasure challenge production). In order to ensure, it can be set relatively long (for example, about 30 seconds). Note that the number of counts in one round (maximum number of winnings) is, for example, 9 for all winning symbols, but winnings rarely occur during an extremely short opening (about 0.1 seconds) ( Not impossible but extremely difficult).

  Step S5206: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds in the current jackpot game based on the winning symbol selected in the big jackpot stop symbol determination process (step S2410 in FIG. 33). Specifically, if the major category “10 round normal symbol” or “10 round probability variation symbol” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to ten. Further, if “16 round probability variation symbol 1”, “16 round probability variation symbol 2” or “16 round probability variation symbol 3” is selected as the winning symbol, the main control CPU 72 sets the number of execution rounds to 16 times. The number of execution rounds set here is stored as a corresponding value on the program (“9” for 10 times, “15” for 16 times), for example, in the buffer area of the RAM 76.

  Step S5208: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a big hit opening timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is operated. If a value of about 29.0 seconds is set as the value of the big hit opening timer, the opening time easily occurs in the first big winning opening or the second big winning opening during one opening. Sufficient time (for example, a time during which 10 or more game balls are fired by the firing control board set 174, preferably 6 seconds or more). On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot opening timer is set to 0.1 seconds, the opening time is that even if it is not possible to enter the first grand prize winning opening or the second big winning prize opening during one opening, It is a short time (which becomes difficult) that hardly occurs (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than the shooting interval of the game balls by the shooting control board set 174).

  Step S5210: The main control CPU 72 sets a big hit interval timer based on the big winning opening opening pattern set in the previous step S5204. The timer value set here is the waiting time between rounds of big hits.

  Step S5212: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big win time big opening / closing operation process and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

[Big prize opening and closing operation processing at big hit]
FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure for a big winning prize opening / closing operation process for a big hit. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, whether or not the interval timer is counting down can be confirmed by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in step S5314 is already in operation.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S5314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5302.

  Step S5302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable winning device 30 or the 2nd variable winning device 31 operates, and it shifts from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S5304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the release timer set in the previous big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5208 in FIG. 46) is executed.

  Step S5306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5308. Execute.

  Step S5308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 (the first large winning port or the second large winning port being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 or the second count switch 85 within the opening time.

  Step S5310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one round of big hit) as described above. If the count has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. Next, when the big win variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the procedure of the above steps S5301 to S5310. Run repeatedly.

  If it is determined in step S5306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S5310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S5312.

  Step S5312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening or the second big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first big prize opening solenoid 90 or the second big prize opening solenoid 97 is stopped. As a result, the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 returns from the open state to the closed state.

  Step S5314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the big hit time big opening opening pattern setting process (step S5210 in FIG. 46).

  Step S5315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown processing is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 is able to win the variable variable prize at the big hit. Return to the end address of the device management process (FIG. 45). Then, when the jackpot big winning opening / closing operation processing is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S5301 and immediately executes step S5314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S5318.

  Step S5318: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter. Note that the value of the number-of-releases counter is stored in the count area of the RAM 76 with an initial value of 0, for example.

  Step S5320: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the number set within the current round. Here, the “number of times set in the current round” is determined, for example, “the first variable winning device 30 and the second variable winning device 31 are opened multiple times within one round of big hit” This is to cope with the open pattern. In the present embodiment, since such an open pattern is not particularly employed, the “number of times set in the current round” is set once for each round. Therefore, since the counter value reaches the set number of times in one opening / closing operation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next proceeds to step S5322.

  If a pattern in which a plurality of opening / closing operations are repeated in one round as described above is employed, the counter value has not yet reached the set number of times at the end of one opening (No). In this case, when the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process, since the jump destination is set to the big win big prize opening / closing operation process at this stage, the procedure from step S5301 to step S5320 is performed. Run repeatedly. As a result, the increment of the number-of-releases counter proceeds in step S5318, and when the counter value reaches the set number of times (Yes), the main control CPU 72 proceeds to step S5322.

  Step S5322: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big winning big prize opening closing process, and returns to the big win variable winning device management process. Then, when the big win time variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a big hit time big winning opening closing process.

[Closing the big prize at the big hit]
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big winning prize closing closing process. This big winning time big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S5402: The main control CPU 72 increments the round number counter. Thereby, for example, the value of the round number counter is “1” at the stage where the first round ends and the second round is reached.

  Step S5404: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the incremented round number counter value has reached the set number of execution rounds. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 refers to the value (1 to 15) of the round number counter after increment, and if the value is less than the set number of execution rounds (1 to 15 after 1 subtraction) (No) Next, step S5405 is executed.

  Step S5405: The main control CPU 72 generates a round number command from the current round number counter value. This command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25) as described above. The effect control device 124 can confirm the current number of rounds based on the received round number command. Note that the process for generating the round number command may be executed in the big hit special prize opening / closing operation process (step S5300) separately from the big hit special prize closing process (step S5400), specifically, It may be executed when a round is started.

  Step S5406: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit big prize opening / closing operation process.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process.

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes the big hit variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 in the big hit game process selection process (step S5100 in FIG. 45), the big jump time big winning opening / closing operation process is the next jump destination. Execute. Then, after the execution of the jackpot big winning opening opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 executes the big hit big winning opening closing process again, and the above steps S5402 to S5408 are executed. Run repeatedly. Thus, the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 is continuously executed until the actual round number reaches the set execution round number (10 times or 16 times).

  When the actual number of rounds reaches the set number of execution rounds (step S5404: YES), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S5410.

  Step S5410, Step S5412: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the round number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the big hit end processing.

  Step S5408: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the big win time variable winning device management process. As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the jackpot variable winning device management process, the jackpot end process is selected this time.

[End processing at jackpot]
FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the big hit end processing. This big-hit end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31 at the time of the big hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S5501: The main control CPU 72 executes a big hit end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the jackpot end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S5502: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the big hit end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the big hit end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module and returns to the big win variable winning device management process (FIG. 45).

  Thereafter, when the value of the big hit time end timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the big hit time end time has passed (Yes), and executes step S5503 and subsequent steps.

  Step S5503, Step S5504: The main control CPU 72 resets the big hit flag (00H). As a result, the big hit gaming state ends on the control processing of the main control CPU 72. In addition, the main control CPU 72 deletes “big hit” from the internal state flag and declares the end of the major role as the internal state in the control processing. The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the continuous operation number status.

  Step S5506: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value (01H) of the probability variation function operation flag is set. This flag is set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-process.

  Step S5508: When the value of the probability variation function operation flag is set (step S5506: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the probability variation number (for example, about 10,000 times). The set value of the probability variation number is stored, for example, in the probability variation counter area of the RAM 76 and becomes the above-described number cut counter value. The probability variation number set here is the upper limit number of times that the variation of the special symbol (internal lottery) is performed in a high probability state in the subsequent games. However, if a huge number of times such as 10,000 is set as described above, there is almost no chance that the non-winning will continue so far (the winning probability at the time of high probability is, for example, 1/39 to 1/39) The degree of probability) will continue until the next winning. On the other hand, when a substantial upper limit is set in the high probability state, the probability variation number is set to a realistic number (for example, about 70 times) (so-called number cut probability change). If the value of the probability variation function activation flag is not set (step S5506: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5508.

  Step S5510: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the time reduction function operation flag (01H) is set. This flag is also set in the big hit other setting process (step S2414 in FIG. 33) during the previous special symbol fluctuation pre-processing.

  Step S5512: If the value of the time reduction function activation flag is set (step S5510: Yes), the main control CPU 72 sets the number of time reductions (for example, 10,000 times or 100 times). The value of the set time reduction count is stored in the time count area of the RAM 76 as described above. The number of times of time reduction set here is the upper limit number of times to shorten the variation time of the special symbol in subsequent games. If the value of the time shortening function activation flag is not set (step S5510: No), the main control CPU 72 does not execute step S5512.

  Step S5514: Then, the main control CPU 72 generates a state designation command based on various flags. Specifically, a state designation command representing “normal” is generated as the gaming state when the big hit flag is reset or the big game ends. If the high-probability state function activation flag is set, a state designation command indicating “high probability” is generated as the internal state, and if the time reduction function activation flag is set, the internal state is “reduced time”. A state designation command representing “medium” is generated. These state designation commands are transmitted to the effect control device 124 in the subcommand transmission process (step S123 in FIG. 25).

  Step S5516: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the big hit time big winning opening releasing pattern setting process.

  Step S5518: Then, the main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is finished, the main control CPU 72 returns to the big win variable winning device management process.

[Variable winning device management process for small hits]
Next, details of the small winning time variable winning device management process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of the small winning hour variable winning device management process. The small winning time prize winning device management process includes a small winning game process selection process (step S6100), a small winning time big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200), and a small hitting big prize opening opening / closing operation process (step S6300). The sub-group includes a subroutine group of a small winning big prize opening closing process (step S6400) and a small winning end process (step S6500).

  Step S6100: In the small hit game process selection process, the main control CPU 72 selects a jump destination of a process to be executed next (any one of steps S6200 to S6500). That is, the main control CPU 72 selects the program address of the process to be executed next from the jump table as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the small winning hour variable winning device management process in the stack pointer as the return address. . Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the operation (opening / closing operation) of the first variable winning device 30 has not started yet, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6200) as the next jump destination. To do. On the other hand, if the small winning big winning opening opening pattern setting processing has already been completed, the main control CPU 72 selects the small winning big winning opening opening / closing operation processing (step S6300) as the next jump destination, If the winning opening / closing operation processing has been completed, the small winning big winning opening closing process (step S6400) is selected as the next jump destination. When the small hitting big winning opening opening / closing operation process and the small hitting big winning opening closing process are repeatedly executed over the set number of continuous operations, the main control CPU 72 performs the small hitting end process (step) as the next jump destination. S6500) is selected. Hereinafter, each process will be described in more detail.

[Big winning opening opening pattern setting process for small hits]
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process. This process is for setting conditions such as the number of times that the first variable prize-winning device 30 is opened and closed at the time of a small hit and the time for each opening. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along each procedure.

  Step S6212: The main control CPU 72 sets a “small hit opening pattern”. In the case of the present embodiment, for the “small hit opening pattern”, for example, an opening pattern of “0.1 second opening” is set for the first time and the second time. Since “small hit” has no concept of “round”, “open pattern” is also expressed as “first open” and “second open”.

  Step S6214: The main control CPU 72 sets the number of times of opening the first big prize opening to, for example, two, based on the big prize opening opening pattern set in the previous step S6212. The number of releases set here is stored in a buffer area of the RAM 76, for example.

  Step S6216: Next, the main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting release timer. The timer value set here is the opening time per operation when the first variable winning device 30 is operated. In this embodiment, as described above, 0.1 seconds is set as the value of the small hitting release timer, and such an opening time is a ball entering the first big prize opening during one opening. Is a short time (which becomes difficult) (for example, a time shorter than 1 second, preferably a time shorter than a game ball firing interval by the launcher unit).

  Step S6218: The main control CPU 72 sets a small hitting interval timer. The timer value set here is a waiting time for each time when the first variable prize-winning apparatus 30 is opened and closed a plurality of times at the time of a small hit, and this timer value is set to about 2 seconds, for example.

  Step S6220: When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process (FIG. 50). The main control CPU 72 then executes a small winning big prize opening / closing operation process (step S6300).

[Large winning opening and closing operation processing for small hits]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning prize winning opening / closing operation process. This process is for controlling the opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the time of a small hit. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6301: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the interval timer is counting down. Specifically, it can be confirmed whether or not the interval timer is counting down by confirming whether or not the interval timer set in the following step S6314 is already operating.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes Step S6314. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the interval timer is counting down (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6302.

  Step S6302: The main control CPU 72 opens the first big prize opening. Specifically, a drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is output. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 operate | moves and it transfers from a closed state to an open state.

  Step S6304: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an open timer countdown process. In this process, the countdown of the opening timer set in the previous small hitting big winning opening opening pattern setting process (step S6216 in FIG. 51) is executed.

  Step S6306: Subsequently, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the opening time has expired. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the release timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the release timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6308. Execute.

  Step S6308: The main control CPU 72 executes a winning ball count process. In this process, the number of game balls that have entered the first variable prize-winning device 30 (first big prize opening being opened) within the opening time is counted. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 increments the count value based on the winning detection signal input from the first count switch 84 within the opening time.

  Step S6310: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the current count number is less than a predetermined number (9). This predetermined number defines the upper limit of the number of winning balls (upper limit of the number of winning balls) allowed per opening (one opening at the time of a small hit) as described above. If the count number has not yet reached the predetermined number (Yes), the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 50). Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, since the jump destination is set to the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process at the present stage, the main control CPU 72 performs the above steps S6301 to S6310. Repeat the procedure.

  If it is determined in step S6306 that the opening time has expired (Yes), or if it is confirmed in step S6310 that the count has reached a predetermined number (No), the main control CPU 72 then executes step S6312. Here, since the value of the release timer is set for a short time, the main control CPU 72 normally performs step opening before confirming that the count number has reached the predetermined number in step S6310. In most cases, it is determined in S6306 that the opening time has expired.

  Step S6312: The main control CPU 72 closes the first big prize opening. Specifically, the output of the drive signal applied to the first grand prize winning solenoid 90 is stopped. Thereby, the 1st variable prize-winning apparatus 30 returns from an open state to a closed state.

  Step S6314: Next, the main control CPU 72 executes an interval timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 executes the count-down of the interval timer set in the above-mentioned small hitting big prize opening opening pattern setting process (step S6218 in FIG. 51).

  Step S6315: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the interval time has ended. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the interval timer after the countdown process is 0 or less. If the value of the interval timer is not yet 0 or less (No), the main control CPU 72 can change the small hit time. Return to the end address of the winning device management process (FIG. 50). Then, when the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process is executed in the next call, the process jumps from the top step S6301 and immediately executes step S6314. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the value of the interval timer after the countdown process has become 0 or less (Yes), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6316.

  Step S6316: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the small winning big winning opening closing process, and returns to the small winning variable winning device management process. Next, when the small winning hour variable winning device management process is executed, the main control CPU 72 next executes a small hitting big prize opening closing process.

[Closed big prize opening closing process]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the small winning big winning opening closing process. The small winning big winning opening closing process is for continuing the operation of the first variable winning device 30 or terminating the operation. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along a procedure.

  Step S6412: The main control CPU 72 increments the value of the opening number counter.

  Step S6414: Next, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the value of the incremented number-of-releases counter has reached the set number of times of release. The number of times of opening is set in the previous big opening opening pattern setting process (step S6214 in FIG. 51). If the value of the opening number counter has not yet reached the set opening number (No), the main control CPU 72 executes step S6416.

Step S6416: The main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination to the big hit prize opening / closing operation process.
Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

  When the main control CPU 72 next executes a variable winning device management process, the main control CPU 72 performs a small winning game big opening / closing operation process in the small jump game process selection process (step S6100 in FIG. 50). Execute. After executing the small winning big prize opening / closing operation process, the main control CPU 72 again executes the small winning big prize opening closing process until the actual number of times of opening reaches the set number of opening times (two times). The opening / closing operation of the first variable winning device 30 is repeatedly executed.

  When the actual number of times of opening at the time of the small hit reaches the set number of times of opening (step S6414: Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S6418.

  Step S6418, Step S6420: In this case, when the main control CPU 72 resets the release number counter (= 0), it sets the next jump destination to the small hit end processing.

  Step S6430: Then, the main control CPU 72 resets the winning ball number counter and returns to the small hitting time variable winning device management process (FIG. 50). As a result, when the main control CPU 72 next executes the variable winning device management process, the small hitting end process is selected this time.

[End processing for small hits]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the small hit end processing. This small hitting end process is for preparing conditions for ending the operation of the first variable winning device 30 at the small hitting. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S6502: The main control CPU 72 executes a small hitting end time timer countdown process. In this process, the main control CPU 72 sets an initial value for the small hitting end time timer, and then counts down the timer as time elapses (each time this module is called).

  Step S6504: Next, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the small hitting end time has elapsed. Specifically, if the value of the small hitting end time timer is not yet 0, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has not elapsed (No). In this case, the main control CPU 72 ends this module, and returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process (FIG. 50).

  Thereafter, when the value of the small hitting end time timer becomes 0 with the passage of time, the main control CPU 72 determines that the small hitting end time has elapsed (Yes), and executes step S6506 and subsequent steps.

  Step S6506, Step S6508: The main control CPU 72 resets the value of the small hit flag (00H), deletes “meeting small hit” from the internal state flag, and ends the small hit game. In the case of small hits, the internal condition device does not operate in particular, so such a procedure is merely for the purpose of erasing the flag.

  Step S6510: After the above procedure, the main control CPU 72 sets the next jump destination in the small winning big opening opening pattern setting process.

  Step S6512: The main control CPU 72 sets the jump destination in the execution selection process (step S1000 in FIG. 32) in the special symbol game process as the special symbol variation pre-process. When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the small winning time variable winning device management process.

[Subcommand transmission processing]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of subcommand transmission processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7004: The main control CPU 72 executes special game management status command generation processing. In this process, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not the value of the special game management status has changed (updated), and generates a special game management status command corresponding to the change.

Here, the special game management status value represents a value set in accordance with the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol. Specifically, it is set as follows.
(1) Special symbol change start waiting state: “00H”
(2) Special symbol fluctuation display state: “01H”
(3) Special symbol stop display state: “02H”
(4) Large winning variable variable winning device (special electric accessory) opening state (when closing the big winning opening between rounds): “03H”
(5) Large winning variable variable winning device (special electric accessory) round state (large winning opening open state): “04H”
(6) Large winning variable variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed effective state: “05H”
(7) Big winning variable winning device (special electric accessory) ending state: “06H”
(8) Small winning medium variable winning device (special electric accessory) Opening state: “07H”
(9) Small winning medium variable winning device (special electric accessory) Large winning opening open state: “08H”
(10) Small winning medium variable winning device (special electric accessory) closed effective state: “09H”
(11) Small winning medium variable winning device (special electric accessory) ending state: “0AH”

  When the progress of the game corresponding to the special symbol is changed and the value of the special game management status is set or updated, the main control CPU 72 generates a special game management status command reflecting the value. The generated command is stored in a predetermined buffer of the RAM 76 (for example, in a command buffer or a ring buffer). Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7006.

  Step S7006: The main control CPU 72 confirms whether there is an unsent command. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 confirms whether or not there is a command (command necessary for presentation control) to be transmitted to the presentation control device 124 in a predetermined buffer (for example, in a command buffer or ring buffer) of the RAM 76. To do. The commands stored in the predetermined buffer of the RAM 76 are the previous process (step S7004), the switch input event process (step S204 in FIG. 27), the special symbol game process (step S205), and the normal symbol game process ( It is generated during the processing of step S206). If there is an untransmitted command as a result of this confirmation (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7008. On the other hand, when there is no unsent command (No), the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 27). In this process, the main control CPU 72 first checks whether the register is ready for port output, and if the register is ready, it checks if there is an unsent command, and if the port cannot be output. Then, the process returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 27).

Step S7008: The main control CPU 72 checks whether or not it is a specific transmission timing. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 checks whether or not the untransmitted command is a command generated at a specific transmission timing. Here, the specific transmission timing represents one of the following timings as shown in FIG.
(A) When waiting for a customer: This represents the timing when a special symbol becomes a state of waiting for a change start.
(B) At the start of fluctuation: This represents the timing at which the special symbol starts the fluctuation display.
(C) When the symbol is determined: This represents the timing at which the special symbol ends the variable display and starts the stop display.
(D) When the symbol determination time has elapsed (only deviation fluctuation): This represents the timing at which the special symbol ends the stop display.
(E) Opening start time: Indicates the timing at which the opening of the big hit or the small hit is started.
(F) When the big winning opening is opened: The timing at which the round starts at the time of the big win, and the first opening timing of the big winning opening (the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable winning device 31) at the small hit. .
(G) When the big prize opening is closed: The timing at which the round ends at the time of the big hit, and the timing at which the final opening of the big prize opening ends at the time of the small hit.
(H) Ending start time: Indicates the timing when the big hit or small hit ending starts.
(I) End of ending: This represents the timing at which the big hit or the small hit ending ends.
(J) At the time of a start winning opening: It represents the timing at which a game ball has won a start winning opening (a middle start winning opening 26 or a variable start winning apparatus 28) related to a special symbol.
(K) At the time of passing through the start gate: The timing at which the game ball has passed through the start gate 20 related to the normal symbol is shown.

  As described above, when any one of the above-mentioned specific transmission timings is reached, the command corresponding to the RAM 76 is stored. Therefore, it is possible to confirm whether or not the specific transmission timing is reached from the content of the command. As a result of this confirmation, when it is a specific transmission timing (Yes), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7010. On the other hand, if it is not a specific transmission timing (No), the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7012.

  Step S7010: The main control CPU 72 generates a model code designation command. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7012.

  Step S7012: The main control CPU 72 concatenates a plurality of commands to generate transmission command information. Specifically, the main control CPU 72 concatenates the commands stored in the command buffer of the RAM 76 according to a predetermined rule and generates one transmission command information.

For example, when a game ball wins a start winning opening (medium starting winning opening 26), transmission command information in which a prefetch specifying command, a model code specifying command, a special figure 1 hold specifying command, and the like are connected is generated.
For example, at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol (first special symbol), the special symbol 1 hold reduction designation command, the model code designation command, the special figure 1 symbol type designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern A designation command, the special figure fluctuation pattern B designation Transmission command information concatenating commands and the like is generated.
For example, when stop display of a special symbol (first special symbol) is started, transmission command information in which a model code designation command, a special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, etc. are linked is generated.
For example, when stop display of special symbol (first special symbol) ends (at the time of losing), game state change designation command after confirmation (only when game state changes), model code designation command, special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation Transmission command information in which a command, a time reduction number designation command, an ST number designation command, a special number designation command, a firing position designation command (only when the firing position changes), and the like are generated is generated.
For example, when there is no hold (operation memory) when the special symbol (first special symbol) is stopped and displayed, that is, when waiting for a customer, the model code designation command, special symbol design confirmation designation command, customer waiting designation command, etc. are linked. The transmitted command information is generated.

For example, when opening a special symbol (first special symbol) jackpot game, model code designation command, special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation command, opening designation command, launch position designation command (only when launch position changes), etc. are linked The transmitted command information is generated.
For example, at the start of a round in the special symbol (first special symbol) jackpot game, transmission command information in which a model code designation command, a special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command, a big prize opening designation command, etc. are linked is generated.
For example, at the end of the round in the big win game of the special symbol (first special symbol), transmission command information in which a model code designation command, a special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command, a big prize closing designation command, etc. are linked is generated.
For example, at the start of ending in a special symbol (first special symbol) jackpot game, transmission command information in which a model code designation command, a special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command, an ending designation command, etc. are linked is generated.
For example, at the end of a special symbol (first special symbol) jackpot game, a model code designation command, a special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command, a short time designation command, an ST number designation command, a special number designation command, a launch position designation command (Only when the launch position is changed), transmission command information in which a post-combination gaming state change designation command is linked is generated.
For example, when there is no hold (working memory) at the end of the big hit game of the special symbol (first special symbol), that is, in the customer waiting state, a model code designation command, a special symbol confirmation designation command, a customer waiting designation command, etc. Concatenated transmission command information is generated.

  When the transmission command information is generated in this way, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7014. In the present embodiment, the model code designation command is transmitted at the same time. However, the setting is such that the command code is transmitted continuously without being transmitted at the same time, for example, the next interrupt process or the predetermined process is finished, and the main control CPU 72 is burdened. You may set to transmit in the timing which does not apply.

Step S7014: The main control CPU 72 port-outputs the transmission command information generated in the previous process (step S7012) to the effect control device 124.
When the above procedure is completed, the main control CPU 72 returns to the interrupt management process (FIG. 27).

  In the present embodiment, the model code designation command is transmitted to the effect control device 124 only at the special transmission timings indicated above (A to K in the figure), but the timing is not limited to these timings. The model code designation command may be transmitted at another timing. For example, the model code designation command may be transmitted at almost all timings when the command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124. Further, for example, the model code designation command may be transmitted every time a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the fluctuation display is started, and the first half fluctuation (pre-reach fluctuation) and the intermediate fluctuation (post-reach fluctuation). ), Second half fluctuation (development fluctuation after reach), or the like, may be transmitted at a predetermined timing during one fluctuation display.

  A command is transmitted to the production control device 124 in order to teach the player that the change has occurred at the timing (for example, A to K in the figure) when an important change occurs in the progress of the game in the main controller 70 However, a model code designation command is sent in addition to the command. That is, since the model code designation command is transmitted at almost all timings when the command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, it is assumed that some kind of trouble occurs in the effect control device 124 and the model information is lost. However, it is possible to reduce the phenomenon that the production is executed based on the wrong model information by the model code designation command received at any timing. Even if the main control device 70 or the effect control device 124 is powered off, the game returns from the power-off state and a new command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at any timing. The production corresponding to the model will return immediately, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

[Model command specification command generation processing]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of a model command designation command generation process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S7022: The main control CPU 72 generates a preceding value of a model code designation command corresponding to the model information. For example, the main control CPU 72 refers to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 58 and generates the preceding value of the model code designation command corresponding to the model information of this gaming machine.

  As for the model information of the gaming machine, for example, it is assumed that the gaming machine has model information such as MAX type, middle type, and sweet digital type. Here, the MAX type, for example, has a very high lottery probability of 1/399 for special symbols, a very large number of balls in a big hit game of 2000, and a probability variation entry rate of 80%. This represents a gaming machine having a high gaming count with a high ST count (probable variation count) of 10,000. The middle type, for example, has a normal lottery probability of 1/299 for special symbols, a normal number of balls in a jackpot game is 1500, and a probability change entry rate is typically 60%. This represents a gaming machine having a game with the number of times (the number of times of probability variation) being 10,000. In addition, the sweet digital type, for example, has a very low 1/99 lottery probability for special symbols, a very small number of balls in the big hit game, 500, and a probability variation entry rate of 100%. This represents a gaming machine having a gaming property in which (the number of times of change in probability) is limited to eight.

  For example, when the model information is MAX type, 90H is set as the preceding value of the model code designation command. If the model information is middle type, 91H is set as the preceding value of the model code designation command. If the model information is a sweet digital type, 92H is set as the preceding value of the model code designation command. When there is other model information, a preceding value that is different from the previously defined preceding values (90H to 92H) (for example, 93H incremented by +1) is set.

  In this way, when the preceding value of the model code designation command is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7024.

  Step S7024: The main control CPU 72 confirms the current gaming state. Specifically, whether the current gaming state is with electric support (operating lottery for normal symbols is a high probability state) or no electric support (operating lottery for normal symbols is a low probability state), or the probability of drawing a special symbol Is a high probability state or a low probability state. Next, the main control CPU 72 executes step S7026.

  Step S7026: The main control CPU 72 generates a subsequent value of the model code designation command corresponding to the gaming state. For example, the main control CPU 72 refers to the correspondence table shown in FIG. 59 and generates a subsequent value of the model code designation command corresponding to the gaming state confirmed in the previous process (step S7024).

  For example, if the gaming state is a state without electric support and the lottery probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, 00H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. Further, when the gaming state is a state with electric support and the lottery probability of the special symbol is a low probability state, the subsequent value of the model code designation command is set to 01H. Further, when the gaming state is the state with the electric support and the lottery probability of the special symbol is the high probability state, the subsequent value of the model code designation command is set to 02H. Further, when the gaming state is a state without electric support and the lottery probability of the special symbol is a high probability state, the subsequent value of the model code designation command is set to 03H.

  As the subsequent value of the model designation command, the subsequent value corresponding to the gaming state is set in the correspondence table shown in FIG. 59, but the subsequent value corresponding to the effect state may be set (so-called special variation ( Subsequent value corresponding to special number)). For example, when the effect state is the normal mode, 00H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. If the effect state is the time reduction mode, 01H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. When the effect state is the probability change mode, 02H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. When the effect state is the super probability variation mode, 03H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. When the effect state is the last one rotation mode, 04H is set as the subsequent value of the model code designation command. Here, the super probability variation mode represents a special mode in which the next big hit is not a regular symbol but a probability variation symbol is selected with high expectation, and the last one rotation mode is a variation display of the next special symbol. It represents a special mode in which the time reduction state or the probability variation state ends.

  Thus, when the subsequent value of the model code designation command is set, the main control CPU 72 next executes step S7028.

  Step S7028: The main control CPU 72 generates a model code designation command. Specifically, the model code designation command is generated by synthesizing the preceding value and the succeeding value generated in the previous processing (step S7022 and step S7026). For example, a model code designation command such as “9002H” is generated. The generated command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 76.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the subcommand transmission process (FIG. 55). This model command designation command generation process may be executed only once for the first time, may be executed every time as long as it does not impose a burden on the main control CPU 72, or may be executed at predetermined timings. Even if the model information is unintentionally changed due to noise, it can be updated to the correct model information by executing it every time (every predetermined timing), and the production control device 124 corresponds to the correct model information. Production can be performed.

[Game Flow]
FIG. 60 is a diagram for explaining a game flow developed in the pachinko machine 1.
When a game is started with the pachinko machine 1, the game is started from [F1] normal mode. In the “normal mode”, the winning probability of the special symbol is “low probability state”, and the winning probability of the normal symbol is “low probability state”. In this way, since the [F1] normal mode is in the “low probability non-time shortened state”, the first special symbol starts to change and the game is started by entering the game ball into the middle start winning opening 26. Progress.

  [F1] In the normal mode, if [F2] “10 round normal symbol” big hit hits, [F3] 10 round big hit game (battle bonus) will be executed, [F4] defeated in the battle of big role effect [F5] Transition to the coast mode.

  [F5] The coast mode is a low probability time shortening state. [F5] In the coast mode, when the winning result is not obtained, [F6] When the special symbol fluctuates 100 times, [F1] shifts to the normal mode.

  [F1] In normal mode, [F7] 10 round jackpot game (battle bonus) or 16 round real 10 round jackpot game if it hits a jackpot of [F7] “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Battle Bonus) is executed, and [F8] wins the battle of the big role production.

  Then, after the end of the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge effect is executed, but [F10] failure effect is executed, and [F11] fireworks rush is entered. [F11] The fireworks rush is in a high probability time shortened state.

  On the other hand, in [F1] normal mode, when [F12] “16 round probability variation 2” big hit, [F3] 16 round big hit game (battle bonus) is executed, [F8] win.

  After the 10th round, [F9] treasure challenge production is executed, [F13] success production is executed, [F14] After 11th to 16th rounds, [F11] fireworks Move to rush.

Although not shown in particular, if it is a big hit of “16 round probability variation 3” in [F1] normal mode, [F5] coast mode, [F11] fireworks rush, a 16 round big hit game (special festival bonus) It is executed and shifts to [F11] fireworks rush.
Note that the above game flow shows an example of a typical game flow, and does not cover all of the game flow.

[Example of production image]
Next, the effect image actually displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described with some examples. As described above, when the big hit internal lottery is performed in the pachinko machine 1, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined under the control of the main control CPU 72, and the variation display by the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. (Design display means). However, as described above, the first special symbol and the second special symbol itself are lighted and blinked by 7-segment LEDs, so that they have poor appeal. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the variable display effect using the effect symbol is performed as described above.

  The effect designs include, for example, a left effect symbol, a middle effect symbol, and a right effect symbol, which are displayed side by side on the left, middle, and right on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (see FIG. 1). ). Each effect design is a design of a picture card with a character attached together with the numbers “1” to “9”, for example. Here, the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol all constitute a symbol row in which the numbers are arranged in descending order of “9” to “1”. Such a symbol sequence is variably displayed so as to flow (scroll) in the vertical direction in the left region, middle region, and right region on the screen.

  FIG. 61 is a continuous diagram showing examples of effect images corresponding to the change display and stop display of special symbols. Note that, here, an example of a change display effect and a stop display effect (result display effect) performed using the effect symbol is shown for the variation of the special symbol at the time of non-winning (losing). This variable display effect is performed between the start of the variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol, but may be the second special symbol) and the stop display (including the fixed stop). It corresponds to a series of productions. Further, the stop display effect is an effect that represents that the special symbol is stopped and displayed and the result of the internal lottery at that time is a combination of the effect symbols. Here, before explaining the specific contents of the control processing, the basic flow of the change display effect and stop display effect for each change employed in the present embodiment will be described.

[Before change display]
61 (A): For example, in a state before the first special symbol starts to change (a state in which the demonstration effect is not being performed), a row of three effect symbols is displayed large on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. ing. At this time, in accordance with the stop display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the effect symbol is also stopped.

  In addition, on the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, markers indicating the number of working memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (reference numerals M1 and M2 are attached in the figure) are displayed. . These markers M1 and M2 indicate the number of operating memories of the first special symbol and the second special symbol corresponding to the respective display numbers (the number of displays of the first special symbol operating memory lamp 34a and the second special symbol operating memory lamp 35a). The number of displays is increased or decreased in conjunction with the change in the number of working memories during the game. In addition, for the markers M1 and M2, the marker M1 corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed as, for example, a circle (◯) in order to facilitate visual discrimination, and the marker M2 corresponding to the second special symbol is, for example, a heart It is displayed with the shape. In the example of FIG. 61A, all four markers M1 are lit and displayed, indicating that the number of working memories of the first special symbol is four, and all the markers M2 are not displayed (in broken lines). This indicates that the number of working memories of the second special symbol is 0 (stored number display effect execution means).

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, for example, the fourth symbol (reference numerals Z1 and Z2 are attached in the diagram) is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. The fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are “fourth effect symbols” following the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and are displayed in a synchronized manner during the change display of the effect symbols. Note that the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are simple marks (for example, “□” figure) with colors, and for example, changing the display color can express a variable display. The fourth symbol Z1 corresponds to the first special symbol, and the fourth symbol Z2 corresponds to the second special symbol.

  Further, the fourth symbols Z1, Z2 are stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation. This is to objectively clarify that the stop display effect is correctly performed and the pachinko machine 1 is operating normally. Therefore, if the result of the internal lottery is actually “10 round big hit” or “16 round big hit” instead of “out of”, the 4th pattern is displayed in a manner corresponding to them (for example, blue display color or red display color). Z1 and Z2 are stopped and displayed.

[Variable display production start]
61 (B): For example, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the fluctuation display effect is started by scrolling the three symbol strings on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 (symbol effect). Execution means, production execution means). In other words, in synchronization with the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol, the display of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled (flowed) in the vertical direction on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42 so as to change the display. Production begins. In the figure, the effect symbol variation display is simply indicated by a downward arrow. Also, during the variable display, each effect symbol is displayed in a transparent state (transparent display), and at this time, an image (background image) that is the background of the effect symbol is displayed on the display screen in an easily visible state. Has been.

  The background image in this case represents, for example, a landscape in which a female character wearing a yukata is sitting on a chaise lounge and relaxing as if the evening is cool. Such a background image expresses that the stay mode in the production is, for example, “normal mode”. In the present embodiment, the “normal mode” corresponds to a normal state in which the fluctuation time shortening function is inactive and the probability fluctuation function is inactive. In addition to this, various modes are provided for effects, and background images with different landscapes and scenes are prepared for each mode (status display effect execution means). The difference between these modes may correspond to an internal “time reduction state” or a “high probability state”. The mode corresponding to each internal state will be further described later. Although not specifically illustrated here, a mode in which a notice effect is performed by displaying an image of a character, an item, or the like on the display screen after that is also possible.

  Further, during the variation display of the effect symbols, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the fourth symbol Z1 expresses the variation display by changing its display color.

[Left design stop]
FIG. 61 (C): For example, when a certain amount of time (about half of the fluctuation time) has elapsed, the left effect design first stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “8” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Here, illustration of the background image is omitted (the same applies to the following).

[Example of production when the number of working memories decreases]
Here, as shown in (B) of FIG. 61, since the number of working memories of the first special symbol decreases by one as the fluctuation starts, the number of markers M1 displayed is linked accordingly. It is reduced by one. For example, if there are four working memories so far, only the oldest (older) memory number display is hidden in the marker M1, and an effect consumed by the internal lottery is also performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the number of working memories for the first special symbol has decreased.

  In the example of (C) in FIG. 61, since the first operation memory in the storage order is consumed and the remaining number becomes three, the three markers M1 remaining on the screen are each one by one. An effect of shifting in the direction (here left direction) is performed. As a result, the context of the change in the number of working memories can be accurately expressed in the production, and the player can be intuitively and easily informed that the working memory has been consumed and decreased by one. it can.

[Right production symbol stop]
In FIG. 61 (D): After the left effect symbol, the right effect symbol thereafter stops changing. In this example, the effect symbol representing the number “3” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. Since it has already been determined that the reach state does not occur at this point, it is almost clear on the appearance that the current fluctuation is a non-reach (normal) fluctuation. Here, reach fluctuations due to slip patterns and the like are excluded. “Slip pattern” means, for example, that once the design symbol representing the number “7” stops, the design symbol slips by one symbol and the design symbol representing the number “8” stops, thereby developing reach It is to do. Alternatively, once the design symbol representing the number “9” stops, the design symbol that represents the number “8” stops as the design sequence slips by one symbol in the opposite direction. is there. In addition, for example, when a production symbol representing a completely different number such as “5” is temporarily stopped and a character appears on the screen and the right production symbol row is changed again, the number “8” is represented. There is also a pattern in which the production design stops and develops to reach.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 61 (E): The last medium effect symbol stops in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. If the result of the current internal lottery is non-winning and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (out-of-game) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the effect symbol representing the number “1” is stopped at the middle position of the screen. In this case, the combination of the effect symbols is “8”-“1”-“3”. Since this is a gap, it is expressed in the production that the current variation corresponds to the normal “out of range”. At this time, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the dislocation.

  The above is an example of the change display effect and the stop display effect (during non-winning) performed using the effect symbol for each change. Through such an effect, the player can have a sense of expectation for winning, and finally the result of the internal lottery can be clearly taught in the effect.

  In addition, the above example is for the case of non-winning, but at the time of big win (winning), after the reach effect is executed during the variable display effect, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a big win mode in the stop display effect. At this time, the stop display mode of the effect symbol basically corresponds to the winning symbol (stop display mode of the first special symbol display device 34 or the second special symbol display device 35) selected internally by the main control CPU 72. Selected.

[Production example at the time of big hit]
FIG. 62 is a continuous diagram showing the flow of reach production executed at the time of a big hit (winning) in the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”. . Here, in addition to the reach effect, a variable display effect, a stop display effect, and a notice effect are included. In addition, an example of the notice effect (the notice effect before the occurrence of reach, the notice effect after the occurrence of reach) executed during the variable display effect will be described.

  In the following reach production, for example, after the first special symbol display device 34 performs the variation display by the variation pattern at the time of the big hit, the first special symbol is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 Any aspect of the round probability variation pattern 1 or 2 (for example, 7-segment LED “self”, “yo”, “mouth”, “巳”, “F”, “E”, “L”, “Γ”, etc. ) Until it is stopped and displayed (reach effect execution means). Note that, in FIG. 62, each effect design is simplified to only numbers. The markers M1 and M2 and the fourth symbols Z1 and Z2 are not shown here. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the flow of production.

[Variable display effects]
62 (A): For example, substantially in synchronism with the start of the fluctuation of the first special symbol, the columns of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol are arranged in the vertical direction (for example, from the top). The variable display effect is started by scrolling down.

[Preliminary production before reach (first stage)]
62 (B): Next, at a relatively early stage of the variable display effect, the first stage pre-reach notice effect using the character image (picture card) is performed. This pre-reach pre-announcement effect is a pre-announcement effect in which the change of the mode progresses in stages from one stage to a plurality of stages (for example, 2 to 5 stages) according to a predetermined order. The pattern image used in the pre-reach notice effect is positioned in front of the effect symbol that is displayed on the screen in a variable manner, for example, so as to appear suddenly from the left edge of the screen (other appearance modes) May be.) Note that the “pre-reach notice” means that a reach or a big hit is announced before any effect symbol is stopped and displayed. By executing such a “pre-reach announcement effect”, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “it may develop into a reach = the possibility of a big hit increases” is obtained.

[Advance notice before the reach occurs (second stage)]
In FIG. 62C, after the first stage of the pre-reach notice effect is executed, the change in the pre-reach notice effect proceeds to the second stage. Here, an effect using a character pattern image different from the previous one is performed as the notice effect before the occurrence of reach in the second stage. Specifically, another pattern image additionally appears from the right end of the screen, and is displayed so as to overlap the front of the previously displayed pattern image. The picture image displayed at this time is larger in size than the picture image displayed previously. And the effect by the sound output that the character expressed by the picture image emits a dialogue (for example, “I will reach” etc.) is also performed.

  Such a pre-reach notice announcement effect (second stage) using the second pattern image is one step further than the pre-reach notice effect (first stage) performed in FIG. It is a development type. In general, it may be expressed as “step-up notice” or the like, referring to the “pre-reach notice notice effect” that develops in this way. Here, an example is given in which the second-stage pattern image appears in the pre-reach notice effect, but the third-stage, fourth-stage, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. There may be. Further, for example, the size may be enlarged each time the third, fourth, and fifth-stage pattern images appear and appear one after another. Even at this stage, the variation display of the effect symbols is continued. In any case, it is possible to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility (expectation) that this change will be a big hit by making the change in the aspect of the pre-reach notice effect to more stages. (For example, the maximum expectation is suggested when progressing to the fifth stage).

[Stop of left design]
In FIG. 62 (D): The middle stage of the variable display effect is approached, and then the variable display of the left effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the left position of the screen.

[Occurrence of reach condition]
In FIG. 62 (E): Subsequently to the left effect symbol, for example, the change display of the right effect symbol is stopped. At this point, the effect symbol representing the number “5” is stopped at the right position of the screen, so that a reach state of “5”-“being changed”-“5” has occurred. On the screen, an image that emphasizes one line that is in a reach state is also displayed. In addition, an effect of outputting a voice such as “Reach!” Is performed. In addition, in this case, if the number “5” is aligned, the expected degree of probability variation jackpot will be high (not the probability variation is confirmed). Can give players various tensions.

  After the reach state occurs, the reach production at the time of winning is executed (however, at this point in time, the winning result has not yet been expressed). In the reach effect, only the effect symbol corresponding to the tempered number (here, “5”) is displayed on the screen, and the others are not displayed. At this time, the effect symbols may be displayed in a reduced state at the four corners of the screen.

[Preliminary notice after reach occurs (first time)]
In FIG. 62, (F): After a reach state has occurred, for example, a notice effect after the occurrence of reach (first time) in which images representing a “heart” figure form a group and pass diagonally on the screen is performed. . In this case, the image of the “heart group” is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the visual appeal to the player can be enhanced. By executing such a notice effect after the visually lively reach occurs, the player can have an even greater expectation.

[Progress of super reach production (specific reach production execution means)]
In FIG. 62 (G): Following the notice effect after the first reach, for example, images representing the numbers “2” to “6” are displayed in a three-dimensional column on the screen. There is an effect in which numerical images are erased from the screen in the order of “2”, “3”, “4”. Such an effect is also performed for the purpose of suggesting (impliciting) or reminding the player that the number “5” is left as it is without being erased. If the number “4” is erased and “5” remains in front of the screen, it means “big hit”, and if the number “5” is also erased, it means “out of place”. In the case of a loss, for example, the number “6” is displayed on the screen after the number “5” is deleted. Therefore, during this time, as the images are erased in order of the numbers “2”, “3”, and “4”, the player's tension and expectation also increase. Then, if the production progresses with the number “4” actually being erased on the screen and the number “5” remaining on the screen, the possibility of a “hit” increases, so the player feels nervous. Also increases at a stretch.

[Preliminary notice after the occurrence of reach (second time)]
In FIG. 62 (H): When the super reach production is approaching the end of the game, the content that the character's image suddenly appears on the screen as if it was split into a large image, and that character emits some dialogue (or silence) (This may be a content of smiling at the event). At this time, for example, the content of the reach effect is a development that “if the number“ 5 ”remains without being erased, the possibility of a big hit of“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”increases” as it is ”. Therefore, by causing a character image to appear greatly at this timing, an effect of giving the player a sense of expectation that “may be a big hit” is obtained.

  As a reach production different from the above, for example, if “numbers“ 2 ”to“ 4 ”are erased and the number“ 5 ”is left unerased at the end,“ 5 ”-“ 5 ”- There is also a development that “5 is a big hit with a design with a high probability of probability change”. When the character image appears at such a timing, an effect can be obtained in which the player has a sense of expectation that “the probability big hit is likely to be near”.

[Stop display effect]
In FIG. 62 (I): For example, the last medium effect symbol stops substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the first special symbol. In this example, the winning symbol internally corresponds to one of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, but the type of winning symbol is not For example, an effect that tells the player that this time corresponds to either “a normal big hit or a probable big hit” this time by stopping and displaying an effect symbol representing “5” in the center of the screen while making the disclosure. Has been done.

  In FIG. 62 (J): For example, the confirmed stop display is also performed for the stop display effect as the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the confirmed stop display of the first special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. By performing such a stop display effect, the player can be informed that the final winning type has been confirmed on the effect. Conversely, by performing an unclear stop display effect on the effect, “whether it is a promising big hit or a normal (non-probable big hit)” can be made undisclosed to the player. .

  In the case of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2”, the winning type will not be disclosed after the end of the big hit game, but “16 round probability variable symbol 3” In the case of, the following production techniques can be adopted. In other words, when “16 round probability variation 3” is internally applied, an even number of production symbols are stopped and displayed, and “7” production symbols are stopped and displayed due to another change (for example, a re-lottery production). There is an effect of promoting to “probable change”, or in the stop display effect, even-numbered effect symbols are stopped and displayed and promoted to “probability” in the effect during the big hit game.

  Further, if the result of the internal lottery is not won, the first special symbol that is the current variation target is stopped and displayed as the off symbol, so that the staging display effect is similarly performed in a manner of deviation. In this case, by displaying the numbers “4” and “6” other than “5” in the center of the screen, unfortunately, an effect is provided informing that the current change did not result in a big hit. Such an effect is executed as an “out of reach reach effect”.

[Examples of directorial performance (battle bonus and treasure challenge)]
FIGS. 63 to 71 are partial examples of the effect of the big role effect that is executed when any of “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, and “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” is applied. FIG.

  In this embodiment, when it corresponds to “10 round normal symbol”, the effect that the ally character is defeated by the enemy character is performed in the big role production (battle bonus), and “10 round probability variation symbol”, “16 rounds” In the case of “probability pattern 1, 2”, an effect that the ally character wins the enemy character is executed. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

[Round 1]
In FIG. 63, (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen, and the battle effect of the big game is started. In the example shown in the figure, a ghost image of an umbrella that is an enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, a female character image that is an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” is displayed in the center of the screen. Is displayed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle effect will be started.

  In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, “5” effect symbol) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the five effect symbols”. In the second round of the big hit game, the same effect as the first round is executed.

[3rd round]
In FIG. 63 (B): When the third round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is given in which the ghost of the umbrella moves from the left side to the right side. Then, the female character is surprised to run away from the ghost of the umbrella and escapes to the right side of the screen.

[Round 4]
In FIG. 63, (C): When the fourth round of the big hit game is started, the battle effect in the big role is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, a female character takes out a round fan (weapon), and an effect is shown in which a flame (aura) appears.

[5th round]
In FIG. 63 (D): And in the fifth round of the jackpot game, the ghost of the umbrella delivers a special move that makes the long tongue pop out of the mouth, and the female character greets the special move with a fan. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with “10 round normal symbol”, and if the female character wins, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” It means that one of them was a big hit.

[6th round (when 10th round normal symbol wins)]
In FIG. 64, (E): In the case of winning with the 10-round normal symbol, the defeat effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production).

[7th round (10 rounds when normal symbol is selected)]
In FIG. 64, (F): In the case of winning in the 10th round normal symbol, the re-challenge promotion effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, an effect is produced in which a female character utters a line such as “Next is not defeated!”. As a result, the player can be motivated to aim for the big hit again. Note that the re-challenge promotion effect similar to the seventh round is executed in the eighth to tenth rounds of the big hit game.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 64 (G): At the timing when the big hit game with 10 rounds of normal symbols ends (during the end process), the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, text information “Coast mode entry!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[6th round (at the time of winning the 10th round)
In FIG. 65 (H): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect).

[Round 7]
In FIG. 65 (I): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a blessing effect is executed in the seventh round. Specifically, a hermit character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an effect of producing the line “I did it well!” Is executed. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of satisfaction to the player that he has won the battle production.

[10th round]
In FIG. 65 (J): In the case of winning with either “10th round probability variation symbol” or “16th round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the blessing effect that started from the seventh round is continued until the tenth round. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which a female character performing a peace sign emits the line “I did it!”.

[Treasure challenge production]
In FIG. 65 (K): In the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, a treasure challenge effect is executed after 10 rounds have ended. In the treasure challenge production, the horse character pulls the treasure, and if the treasure can be attracted, six substantial jackpot rounds are added. The treasure challenge production is executed at the end time after the 10th round is completed in the case of winning with the “10th round probability variation symbol”, and in the case of “16th round probability variation symbol 1, 2” the tenth round. And the interval time between the 11th round.

[Game description production]
In FIG. 66 (L): When the treasure challenge effect is started, a game explanation effect is first executed. In the example shown in the figure, a hermit character is displayed on the right side of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “If you draw a treasure, add a round!”.

  In FIG. 66 (M): When the game explanation effect ends, an item provision effect in which the female character provides an item is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a female character straddling a horse takes out an item (food) is executed.

  In FIG. 66 (N): An effect is performed in which the horse character eats the food provided by the female character. At this time, for example, depending on the type of item to be provided, the reliability of success or failure in the treasure challenge effect can be varied.

  In FIG. 67, (O): The screen is switched, the sharp eyes of the horse character are displayed, and the characters “Ready” are displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 67 (P): The characters “GO!” Are displayed at the top of the screen, and it is instructed that the effect-changing effect of the effect switching button 45 has started. In addition, a button image in which the effect switching button 45 is simplified is displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switching button 45 is performed. Around the button image, a time meter indicating the lapse of the button effective time is displayed so as to surround the button image, and here, one square corresponds to about 1 second. In the example shown in the figure, all the eight square time meters are displayed as colored images, so that the press of the effect switching button 45 is effective for about 8 seconds from now on. Each square of the time meter decreases by one square every time 1 second elapses.

  In FIG. 67 (Q): It is assumed that, in response to an effect that prompts the player to press the effect switch button 45, the player has started to repeatedly press the effect switch button 45. Then, the horse character begins to step on the foot in response to repeated hitting of the effect switching button 45, and the effect of gradually moving to the left is executed. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are 6 squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about 6 seconds.

  In FIG. 68 (R): The player continues to hit the effect switching button 45 continuously. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the vicinity of the center. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are four squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about four seconds.

  In FIG. 68 (S): Continuous play of the effect switching button 45 is continued by the player. In the illustrated example, the horse character has reached the left end of the screen. At this time, since the remaining squares of the time meter are two squares, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about two seconds.

  In FIG. 68 (T): When the repetitive striking effect of the effect switching button 45 has reached the final stage, a cut-in notice effect is displayed that is suddenly displayed on the screen so that the character image is split into a large image. . In the example shown in the figure, a female character is displayed in an area cut diagonally on the screen, and a scene in which the female character is praying with both hands together is displayed. At this time, since the time meter has one remaining cell, the player can be informed that the remaining effective time of the effect switching button 45 is about one second.

[16 rounds probable variation 2 wins]]
In FIG. 69 (U): In the case of winning with “16 round probability variation 2”, a successful production in the treasure challenge production is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the treasure tied to the tip of the string pulled by the horse character pops out vigorously.

  In FIG. 69 (V): A character “success” is displayed at the top of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “Fantastic!”. Such a successful effect corresponds to “16-round probability variation 2”, and a predetermined random number lottery (for example, 1/10) executed when the button is pressed once within the button effective time. When winning in the random number lottery to be won), it is executed when the button is pressed more than a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) within the button effective time or when the button effective time elapses.

[Eleventh round]
In FIG. 69 (W): When the interval time between the 10th and 11th rounds ends, the 11th round is started. The eleventh and subsequent rounds are positioned as special rounds, and character information of “special round” is displayed at the bottom of the screen, and a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[12th round]
In FIG. 70, (X): Special round effects are continued in the 12th round as well. In the illustrated example, a female character unique to the special round is displayed.

[16th round]
In FIG. 70 (Y): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the special round A unique effect image is displayed.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 70, (Z): At the timing when the big hit game is finished, the big end finish effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[10-round probability variation or 16-round probability variation symbol 1 win]
FIG. 71 (a): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1”, a failure rendering in the treasure challenge effect is executed. Specifically, an effect is performed in which a string pulled by a horse character breaks in the middle.

  In FIG. 71 (b): The character “failure” is displayed at the top of the screen, and the effect that the character of the hermit emits the speech “sorry” is executed. Such failure production is executed by using a part of the end time in the case of winning with “10th round probability variation symbol”, and from the 11th round in the case of winning with “16th round probability variation symbol 1”. It is executed using the fast opening time up to the 16th round. In addition, in the 11th to 16th rounds when winning with “16 round probability variation 1”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened 4 times, but the opening time is set extremely short, so The profit by is hardly obtained.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 71, (c): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush in the “high probability time shortened state” as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Examples of fireworks rush production]
FIG. 72 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the effect of fireworks rush. This fireworks rush is a mode that is shifted to after a big hit game when either of the “10 round probability variation symbols” or “16 round probability variation symbols 1, 2, 3” corresponds to a big hit. Fireworks rush is a state with high probability time reduction. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 72 (A): For example, the first variation display after the end of the big hit game is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush”. In order to deeply impress the player with the fireworks motif, the background image of the fireworks rush is a background image that expresses "a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky" and "a female character watching fireworks" It has become. Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 72 (B): Since the first change (when not winning) after the end of the big hit game, all effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("3"-"1"-"7 "). Further, the fourth symbol Z1 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In FIG. 72 (C): When the next fluctuation is started, the second fluctuation display is performed after the big hit game ends. In the illustrated example, the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the first special symbol is shown. However, in the high probability time shortening state, the variable start winning device 28 is operated at a high frequency. As long as the player continues to make a right turn, the variation display of the second and subsequent times after the end of the big hit game is often performed with the variation display of the effect symbol accompanying the variation display of the second special symbol.

FIG. 73 to FIG. 76 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects executed at the time of winning or losing in the fireworks rush.
The following effect examples are effect examples that are executed when a big hit is made in the fireworks rush or when a loss reach effect is selected. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  In FIG. 73, (A): In the state of “fireworks rush”, the change display of the effect symbol is performed. In the example shown in the drawing, a background image expressing “a scene where a female character is watching fireworks” is displayed together with “a scene where fireworks are launched in the night sky”. In addition, a fourth symbol Z1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a fourth symbol Z2 corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed on the upper right of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42. Here, the fourth symbol Z2 varies. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 73 (B): For example, an effect is performed in which a female character utters the line “Game! By executing such an effect, it is possible to give the player an impression that “something will begin in the future”. In addition, from this point of time, in order to display the effect of making the ally character and the enemy character play against each other on the screen, the effect display effect is executed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“2”). -"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  73C: For example, a panda character (enemy character) appears on the left side of the screen, a female character (friend character) appears on the right side of the screen, and an image of the character “VS” appears in the center of the screen. Production to be performed. Thereby, it can be taught to the player that a battle reach effect will be started. It should be noted that a reach state has occurred in the effect symbol that is variably displayed at the upper left of the screen ("2"-"fluctuating"-"2").

  In FIG. 74 (D): After that, the battle reach effect is specifically advanced. In the example shown in the figure, an effect is performed in which the panda character moves toward the female character. Then, there will be a performance in which the female character runs away with surprise and disappears to the right side of the screen.

  In FIG. 74 (E): This time, a female character takes out a drum (weapon), and an effect in which a flame (aura) appears from the drum is performed. In this effect example, an effect of fighting an enemy character using a drum is executed, but an effect of fighting an enemy character using a fan, for example, can also be executed. Thus, the expectation degree of jackpot can be changed by changing the weapon used for a battle.

  In FIG. 74 (F): An effect is performed in which the female character turns the drum toward the panda character.

  In FIG. 75 (G): Subsequently, an effect in which a wave is emitted from the drum is executed. If you can defeat the panda character in this state, it will be a big hit.

[When disconnected]
In FIG. 75 (H): When the variation of the special symbol this time corresponds to non-winning, an effect is performed in which the panda character successfully avoids the wave fired from the drum.

  In FIG. 75, (I): A panda character is displayed in a large size together with a character “defeated...” And a female character is displayed in a small size. Then, at the upper left corner position of the screen, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a state where the effect symbol is reduced ("2"-"3"-"2").

  In FIG. 75 (J): In this case, a stop display effect as an effect symbol is performed in synchronization with the special symbol stop display. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed, for example, in a state where the left, middle and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  After this, since the fireworks rush continues, the player will aim for the next big hit during the fireworks rush.

[When winning]
In FIG. 75 (K): On the other hand, if this special symbol variation hits a big hit, the panda character will wave, causing an explosion that will cause the panda character to fly far away. Executed.

  In FIG. 75 (L): When the female character is displayed large together with the characters “Victory!” And the panda character is displayed small, it is transmitted to the player that it is a big hit (winning). At the upper left corner of the screen, the stop display effect is executed with the effect symbol reduced (“2”-“2”-“2”). However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped.

  In FIG. 75 (M): The effect symbols are returned to the state where the left, middle, and right effect symbols are restored to their initial sizes. However, all of the three production symbols are displayed swinging from side to side, and the variation of the production symbols is not completely stopped. At this time, the special symbol is in a changing state, and the fourth symbol Z2 is also in a changing state.

[Promotion opportunity promotion]
In FIG. 76 (N): When there are three production symbols, it is determined that the big hit is there, but it depends on the size of the profit (outgoing ball) obtained by the big hit game (the number of rounds is determined) Promotion chance production is executed.
In the example shown in the drawing, the character information “promotion chance” is displayed on the upper part of the screen. As a result, the player can be given a sense of expectation that the promotion chance effect will be started from now, and the player may be promoted from “2 effect design” to “7 effect design”.

  In FIG. 76, (O): The effect pattern in which the three lined effect symbols are gradually displayed in a small size and the effect lined in the screen is sucked into the back side while rotating.

  In FIG. 76 (P): The three effect symbols become so small that they are hardly visible. At that time, the image of the effect switch button 45 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and the player presses the press of the effect switch button 45. An effect is urged.

[Promotion chance failure production]
In FIG. 76 (Q): If the promotion chance effect fails, that is, if it falls under either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the promotion chance failure rendering is Executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. In this case, however, the number of the production symbol is not changed (it remains “2”).

  In FIG. 76, (R): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, green display color) corresponding to the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”. Thereafter, the above-described battle bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen.

[Promotion of successful promotion]
In FIG. 76 (S): On the other hand, when the promotion chance effect is successful, that is, when it corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3”, the promotion chance success effect is executed. In this case, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed, an effect that the effect symbol pops out from the back side to the near side is executed, and the effect symbol is enlarged and displayed so that not all of the three effect symbols can be displayed. The number of the production symbol is changed from “2” to “7”.

  In FIG. 76 (T): The stop display effect is also performed for the effect symbol substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol. The stop display effect of the effect symbol is performed in a state where the effect symbol is completely stopped without shaking. The fourth symbol Z2 is actually stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, orange display color) corresponding to the “16-round probability variable symbol 3”. After that, a special festival bonus effect (acting during the big role) is executed on the screen that is a big hit of 16 rounds.

[Director-in-chief production (normal special festival bonus production)]
FIG. 77 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of a big-game effect executed during a jackpot game when “16 round probability variation 3” is met. This big role production is executed, for example, when a success production is executed in the above promotion chance production.

[1 round]
In FIG. 77 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game is being executed. In the role-playing effect, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. In addition, an effect symbol corresponding to the current winning symbol (here, the number “7”) is displayed at the lower right corner of the screen. Thus, by continuously displaying the winning symbol (so-called “remaining eye”) even during the big hit game, it is possible to continuously instruct the player of the information “winning with the seven effect symbols”. In addition, characters of “Special Festival Bonus” are displayed in the lower left area of the display screen, and images about festivals such as “Uchiwa” and “Taiko” are displayed around the screen.

[16 rounds]
In FIG. 77 (B): After that, when the big hit game progresses smoothly and moves to the final 16 rounds, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and the big hit game is being played. A unique effect image is displayed. Further, the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “remaining eye” is continuously displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen.

[At the end of a major role]
(C) in FIG. 77: At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed. In this example, for example, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen. By executing such a big game end effect, the player can be instructed to shift to the fireworks rush state with a high probability time reduction state as a privilege after the big hit game ends.

[Director-in-chief production (first special special festival bonus production)]
FIG. 78 corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3” and the jackpot game in the case where there is a plan that is scheduled to correspond to “16 round probability variation 3” (within the stored working memory). It is a continuous figure which shows partially the example of the special big-game medium effect (it is set as the 1st special special festival bonus effect) performed inside. In addition to the first special special festival bonus production, the special big-game production includes the second special special festival bonus production and the third special special festival bonus production. Examples of such production will be described later.

[1 round]
In FIG. 78, (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. Here, the same effect as the normal special festival bonus effect ((A) in FIG. 77) (the effect that character information such as “ROUND1” and “special festival bonus” is displayed) is executed.

  The variable winning devices are operated based on the release pattern corresponding to “16 round probability variation 3”. Specifically, the first variable prize-winning device 30 operates for a long time (up to 29.0 seconds) every round in the first to tenth rounds, and the second variable prize-winning device also in the 11th to 16th rounds. 31 runs for a long time (up to 29.0 seconds) per round. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, the second variable winning device 31 with the decoration “3rd” does not operate (open) in the first round. The second round to the tenth round do not operate (open) in the same manner. Note that the effect symbol (the number “7”) as the “left eye” displayed at the lower right corner position of the screen is omitted.

[2 rounds]
In FIG. 78 (B): When the second round of the big hit game is started, as in the first round, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the game progress status of “big hit” is executed. Up to the eighth round, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds is changed, or the background image is changed, and the big-bodied effect corresponding to the progress status is executed.

[9 rounds]
In FIG. 78 (C): When the big hit game progresses smoothly and shifts to the ninth round, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND9” is displayed on the screen, and an effect unique to the big hit game is displayed. An image is displayed. In this example, for example, character information such as “3rd attacker will open on ROUND 11-16!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect that a female character emits a similar line is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the second variable winning device 31 is operated from the 11th round instead of the first variable winning device 30 that has been operated (opened).

[10 rounds]
79 (D): When the 10th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Is displayed. In this example, for example, character information such as “If you store 20 passage balls with ROUND 11-16, the on-hold continuous change is confirmed!” Is displayed on the screen, and the effect that the female character emits a similar line is performed. Thus, the player can be informed that there is a possibility that the game ball may stay in the transparent collection passage 31c where the game ball that has entered (winned) in the second grand prize opening will pass. . Further, when a predetermined number of game balls stay in the collection passage 31c, there is a plan that corresponds to a big hit in the holding (in the stored operation memory), and the big hit is generated continuously. Can be taught to the player.

[11 rounds]
79 (E): When the eleventh round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND11” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the jackpot game. Has been. In this example, for example, text information such as “Storage start! Now 0/20!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect that the female character emits a similar line (only storage start) is performed. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that the storage game to be performed between the 11th and 16th rounds has started and that no game balls are currently stored (0).

  The second variable winning device 31 operates for a long time (up to 29.0 seconds) for each round based on the release pattern corresponding to “16-round probability variation 3”. Therefore, as shown in the drawing, the opening / closing member 31a of the second variable winning device 31 with the decoration of “3rd” is operated, and the game ball entered (winned) in the opened second major winning opening is transparent. It passes through the inside of the recovery path 31c. In this example, the game ball is stored in the collection passage 31 without being stored.

[11 rounds]
In FIG. 79, (F): When the eleventh round of the jackpot game further progresses, in this example, for example, character information such as “currently 5/20! Good luck!” Is displayed on the screen. Further, in this example, a state is shown in which five stored game balls are newly increased and a total of five game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that five game balls are currently stored.

[12 rounds]
In FIG. 80 (G): When the 12th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND12” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, character information such as “currently 10/20 pieces !!!! another half !!” is displayed on the screen. Further, in this example, a state is shown in which five game balls stored from the previous time are newly increased and a total of ten game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that ten game balls are currently stored.

[13 rounds]
In FIG. 80 (H): When the 13th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND13” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, character information such as “currently 17/20! In this example, seven game balls stored from the previous time are newly increased, and a total of 17 game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that 17 game balls are currently stored. Furthermore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the big hit game may be continued.

[14 rounds]
In FIG. 80, (I): When the 14th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND14” is displayed on the screen, and a unique effect image is displayed during the jackpot game. Has been. In this example, for example, text information such as “currently 12/20! Further, in this example, a state is shown in which five game balls stored from the previous time are newly reduced and a total of 12 game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that 12 game balls are currently stored. Furthermore, it is possible to cause the player to feel uneasy that the big hit game may not continue, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game with respect to the game.

[15 rounds]
In FIG. 81 (J): When the 15th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND15” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, text information such as “currently 15/20! Further, in this example, a state is shown in which three game balls stored from the previous time are newly increased and a total of 15 game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that 15 game balls are currently stored. Furthermore, the player can have a sense of expectation that the big hit game may be continued.

[16 rounds]
81 (K): When the final 16th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and an effect unique to the jackpot game is displayed. An image is displayed. In this example, for example, text information such as “currently 20/20 pieces !!!!! Congratulations! Further, in this example, a state is shown in which five game balls stored from the previous time are newly increased and a total of 20 game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c. Thereby, it is possible to teach the player that 20 game balls are currently stored. Furthermore, the player can be informed that it has been determined that the big hit game will continue.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 81 (L): At the timing when the big hit game ends, the big end ending effect of the content teaching the internal state (high probability time shortening state) to be transferred after this is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen.

  Moreover, a mode that the game ball stored in the collection | recovery channel | path 31c is discharged | emitted is represented. Thus, the player can be informed that the game has been successfully completed in a series of storage games such as whether or not a predetermined number of game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c started from the eleventh round.

[Start of the first change after the big hit game ends]
In FIG. 82 (M): For example, the first variation display is performed after the end of the big hit game, and the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the state of “fireworks rush” in the screen.

[Start of the third change after the big hit game ends]
In FIG. 82 (N): After that, the fluctuation display at the time of the second special symbol deviation is performed twice, the third fluctuation display is performed, and the variation display of the effect symbol is displayed in the state of “fireworks rush” on the screen. Has been done. Note that it is assumed that the internal lottery of the second special symbol of the third variation corresponds to winning and the stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponds to “16 round probability variable 3”.

[End of 3rd change after big hit game]
In FIG. 82 (O): After that, the fluctuation display at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is finished, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in the big hit mode on the screen ("7"-"7"-"7" ).

[1 round]
In FIG. 82 (P): The first round of the new jackpot game is started, and the big-game effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game “during jackpot” is executed. Here, since the stop symbol corresponds to “16-round probabilistic symbol 3”, the corresponding big actor production (character festival information such as “Special Festival Bonus” (“ROUND1” and “Special Festival Bonus” is displayed) ) Is executed. Here, if there is a plan that corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3” in the hold, a special big role production (first to third special special festival bonus production) will be started again, If it is not within the hold, the normal special festival bonus effect (FIG. 77) will be started.

[Director during big role (2nd special special festival bonus)]
FIG. 83 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the second special special festival bonus effect among the special big-game effects. Note that the second special special festival bonus production is the same as the first special special festival bonus production ((A) to (C) in FIG. 78) up to the ninth round of the jackpot game. Explain from the eyes.

[10 rounds]
83 (D): When the 10th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, text information such as “If you can push a button during ROUND 11-16 to save a ball in the aisle! The production is performed. Accordingly, when the effect switching button 45 is pressed during the big hit game, the game ball may stay in the transparent collection passage 31c through which the game ball that has entered (winned) passes in the second grand prize opening. The player can be informed that there is. Furthermore, when a game ball stays in the collection passage 31c, there is a plan that corresponds to a big hit in the holding (in the stored operation memory), and the player is told that the big hit is continuously generated. Can be taught.

[11 rounds]
In FIG. 83 (E): When the eleventh round of the jackpot game is started, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND11” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, an image of the effect switching button 45 and character information such as “Please!” Are displayed on the screen, and an effect in which a female character emits a similar line is performed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the effect switching button 45 can be pressed.

[11 rounds]
In FIG. 83 (F): The eleventh round of the jackpot game proceeds, and the effect is executed when the effect switch button 45 is pressed by the player. In this example, for example, an image in which the effect switching button 45 displayed on the screen disappears or character information such as “sorry ...” is displayed, and an effect in which a female character emits a similar line is performed. Thereby, the player can be informed that the game ball has failed to be stored in the collection passage 31c by pressing the effect switching button 45. In this example, the game ball is not stored in the collection passage 31 but is passing therethrough.

[13 rounds]
84 (G): When the 13th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND13” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, an image of the effect switching button 45 and character information such as “Please!” Are displayed on the screen, and an effect in which a female character emits a similar line is performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the effect switching button 45 can be pressed again.

[13 rounds]
In FIG. 84 (H): The 13th round of the jackpot game proceeds, and the effect is executed when the effect switch button 45 is pressed by the player. In this example, for example, an image in which the effect switching button 45 displayed on the screen disappears or character information such as “sorry ...” is displayed, and an effect in which a female character emits a similar line is performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the player has failed to store the game ball in the collection passage 31c by pressing the effect switching button 45 again. In this example as well, a game ball is shown passing through without being stored in the collection passage 31.

[15 rounds]
84 (I): When the 15th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND15” is displayed on the screen, and an effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. In this example, for example, an image of the effect switching button 45 and character information such as “Last!” Are displayed on the screen, and an effect in which a female character emits a similar line is performed. Thereby, it is possible to tell the player that the chance to press the effect switching button 45 is the last.

[15 rounds]
In FIG. 85, (J): The 15th round of the jackpot game proceeds, and the effect is executed when the effect switch button 45 is pressed by the player. In this example, for example, an image of “V” and character information such as “Great success!” Are displayed on the screen, and an effect that a female character emits a similar line is performed. As a result, the player can be informed that the game ball has been successfully stored in the collection passage 31c as a result of the press of the effect switching button 45. In this example, a state in which game balls are stored in the collection passage 31 is shown.

[16 rounds]
85 (K): When the final 16th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and an effect unique to the jackpot game is displayed. An image is displayed. In this example, for example, an image of “V” and character information such as “Confirm on-hold continuous change!” Are displayed on the screen, and an effect that a female character emits a similar line is performed. As a result, the player can be informed that the game ball has been successfully stored in the collection passage 31c as a result of the press of the effect switching button 45. Further, in this example, a state in which game balls are continuously stored in the collection passage 31c is shown. Thus, it is possible to teach the player that it has been determined that the big hit game will continue.

[At the end of a major role]
In FIG. 85 (L): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state (high probability time shortening state) to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen.

  Moreover, a mode that the game ball stored in the collection | recovery channel | path 31c is discharged | emitted is represented. Thereby, the player is informed that the game has been successfully completed in the storage game as to whether or not the game ball can be stored in the collection passage 31c by pressing the effect switching button 45 started from the 10th round. be able to.

[Start of the third change after the big hit game ends]
86 (M): Thereafter, after the end of the big hit game, the variation display at the time of the second special symbol losing is performed twice, the third variation display is performed, and the production is performed in the state of “fireworks rush” in the screen. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that it is assumed that the internal lottery of the second special symbol of the third variation corresponds to winning and the stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponds to “16 round probability variable 3”.

[End of 3rd change after big hit game]
86 (N): Thereafter, the variation display at the time of the big hit of the second special symbol is finished, and the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in a big hit manner on the screen ("7"-"7"-"7" ).

[1 round]
86 (O): Then, the first round of the new jackpot game is started, and the big-game effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game “during jackpot” is executed. Here, since the stop symbol corresponds to “16-round probabilistic symbol 3”, the corresponding big actor production (character festival information such as “Special Festival Bonus” (“ROUND1” and “Special Festival Bonus” is displayed) ) Is executed.

[Director-in-chief production (bonus production at the third special special festival)]
FIG. 87 is a continuous diagram partially showing an example of the third special special festival bonus effect among the special big-game effects.

[1 round]
87 (A): When the first round of the big hit game is started, the big role effect of the content corresponding to the progress status of the game, “big hit” is executed. Here, the same effect as the normal special festival bonus effect ((A) in FIG. 77) (the effect that character information such as “ROUND1” and “special festival bonus” is displayed) is executed.

[10 rounds]
In FIG. 87 (B): When the big hit game progresses smoothly and the tenth round is entered, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND10” is displayed on the screen, and an effect unique to the big hit game is displayed. An image is displayed. In this example, for example, character information such as “3rd attacker will open on ROUND 11-16!” Is displayed on the screen, and an effect that a female character emits a similar line is performed. Accordingly, it is possible to teach the player that the second variable winning device 31 is operated from the 11th round instead of the first variable winning device 30 that has been operated (opened).

[11 rounds]
87 (C): When the eleventh round of the jackpot game is started, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND11” is displayed on the screen, and the effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. An effect image similar to the normal special festival bonus effect is displayed as a unique effect image. Further, in this example, the game ball is shown passing through without being stored in the collection passage 31c.

[15 rounds]
88 (D): When the 15th round of the jackpot game is started, the character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND15” is displayed on the screen, and the effect image unique to the jackpot game is displayed. Has been. An effect image similar to the normal special festival bonus effect is displayed as a unique effect image. In this example, the game ball is not stored in the collection passage 31 but is passing therethrough.

  Therefore, from the first round to the fifteenth round, the game balls are not stored in the collection passage 31c, and unlike the first and second special special festival bonus effects, the same as the normal special festival bonus effects. Will be executed. Thereby, it can be suggested to the player that there is no special big-game effect that is executed during the big hit game when there is a plan that falls under “16 round probability variation 3” in the hold.

[16 rounds]
88 (E): When the final 16th round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND16” is displayed on the screen, and an effect unique to the jackpot game is displayed. An image is displayed. An effect image similar to the normal special festival bonus effect is displayed as a unique effect image.

  Further, in this example, a state in which about 10 game balls are stored in the collection passage 31 is shown. Therefore, unlike the first to fifteenth rounds, game balls are stored in the collection passage 31c, and the third special special festival bonus production different from the normal special festival bonus production has been executed. Represents. In addition, this suggests to the player that a special big-game effect that is executed during a big hit game is executed when there is a plan that falls under “16 round probability variation 3” in the hold. can do.

[At the end of a major role]
88 (F): At the timing when the big hit game is ended, the big end effect of the content teaching the internal state (high probability time shortening state) to be transferred thereafter is executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Fireworks rush rush!” Is displayed on the screen.

  Further, in this example, a state where about 10 game balls are still stored in the collection passage 31 is shown. The number is not limited to ten, and a smaller number of game balls may be stored (for example, one or two). Therefore, since the game ball is stored in the collection passage 31 despite the end of the big hit, the player can be expected to produce the future, and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[Start of the first change after the big hit game ends]
FIG. 89 (G): For example, when the first variable display is performed after the end of the big hit game, the power interruption notice effect is executed on the screen. Specifically, the liquid crystal screen is blacked out and an effect is performed as if the gaming machine is turned off. The effect symbol is displayed in a variable manner in a reduced state at the upper left corner of the screen ("Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating"-"Fluctuating").

  In FIG. 89 (H): The power interruption notice effect proceeds with the passage of time. Specifically, the restoration effect is executed as if the power source of the gaming machine is restored. In the example shown in the figure, a status bar indicating the time until the special festival bonus occurs is displayed together with the text information “Please wait for a while. Special festival bonus is being prepared.” In addition, the effect design is displayed in a state of being reduced at the upper left corner position of the screen (“changed” − “changed” − “changed”).

  Further, in this example, a state where the game balls stored in the collection passage 31 are discharged is shown. Here, as described above, when the game ball is discharged from the collection passage 31, it is produced as if the game ball entered (wins) the middle start winning opening 26. Therefore, in this case, it can be expressed as if the special festival bonus has been confirmed by the game ball entering (winning) the middle start winning opening 26. In addition, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol may be suggested by adjusting the number of game balls to be stored. For example, by storing three game balls, the third change after the big hit game is a big hit It may be suggested that this is true.

[End of 1st change after big hit game]
(I) in FIG. 89: After that, after the big hit game ends, the first variation display ends and a stop display is performed. In the example shown in the figure, the status bar indicating the time until the special festival bonus is generated is displayed in a state where it has progressed about half of the time, together with the text information “Please wait for a while. Special festival bonus is being prepared.” Further, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a reduced state at the upper left corner position of the screen ("6"-"3"-"4").

[End of 2nd change after big hit game]
In FIG. 90 (J): Time further advances, and after the jackpot game is over, the second variation display is ended and a stop display is performed. In the example shown in the figure, a status bar indicating the time until the special festival bonus is generated is displayed in a state of progressing by about 70% together with the character information “Please wait for a while. Special festival bonus is being prepared.” Further, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a reduced state at the upper left corner position of the screen (“5” − “2” − “6”).

[Start of the third change after the big hit game ends]
In FIG. 90 (K): After that, the fluctuation display at the time of the deviation of the second special symbol is performed twice, and the third fluctuation display is performed. In the example shown in the figure, a status bar indicating the time until the special festival bonus is generated is displayed and progressed to the final stage together with the character information “Please wait for a while. Special festival bonus is being prepared.” In addition, the effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a reduced state at the upper left corner position of the screen ("changing"-"changing"-"changing"). Note that it is assumed that the internal lottery of the second special symbol of the third variation corresponds to winning and the stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponds to “16 round probability variable 3”.

(Door closing effect)
In FIG. 90 (L): When the status bar of the restoration effect moves to the right side, the doors (襖) appear from both sides of the display screen, and the effect of closing in the middle is performed. Such a door closing effect is performed for the purpose of attracting the player's eyes by changing the display contents from the restoration effect screen so far.

(Door opening production)
91 (M): Next, the closed door quickly moves to the left and right of the display screen, and an effect (door opening effect) representing the operation of greatly opening the door is performed. Such a door opening effect is performed, for example, in the sense that the player is interested in the result of the opening of the door.

[End of 3rd change after big hit game]
91 (N): When the door is opened, the stop display effect is started in a big hit mode. Specifically, the stop display effect of the effect symbols is performed in a state where the effect symbols (“7”-“7”-“7”) are completely stopped without shaking.

  As described above, when the third special special festival bonus production is started in the special big role production, the production associated with the third special special festival bonus production after the jackpot game is over (electrical warning notice production) , Restoration effect, door opening / closing effect).

[1 round]
In FIG. 91, (O): The first round of a new jackpot game is started, and the big-game effect with the content corresponding to the progress of the game, “Big hit” is executed. Here, since the stop symbol corresponds to “16-round probabilistic symbol 3”, the corresponding big actor production (character festival information such as “Special Festival Bonus” (“ROUND1” and “Special Festival Bonus” is displayed) ) Is executed.

  In this way, when the winning action corresponding to “16 round probability variation 3” is included in the stored working memory during the big hit game, the first to third special special festival bonus effects are executed. The Further, during the first to third special special festival bonus effects, when the game ball passes for a long time in the collection passage 31c having a long stay time, the storage device 31t is operated to enter the collection passage 31c. Innovative effects such as storing game balls are executed. In this way, by performing the effect of informing the on-hold continuous chain that the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening is stored in the collection passage that can be reliably recognized, It is possible to give an impression of being added to the ball and to give the player a sense of expectation for the next time.

[Example of coast mode production]
FIG. 92 is a continuous diagram showing an example of the coast mode effect. This coast mode is a mode that is shifted to after the end of the big hit game in the case of the “10 round normal symbol”. The coast mode is a “low probability time reduction state”. Hereinafter, the flow of production will be described in order.

  92 (A): For example, after the big hit game in “10 round normal symbol” is finished, the first variation display is performed, so that the variation display of the effect symbol is performed in the “coast mode” state. Yes. The background image of the coast mode is a background image with motifs of images such as “sand beach”, “sea”, and “mountain” in order to express the healing impression that is the concept of the coast mode. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is variably displayed at the lower part of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42.

  In FIG. 92 (B): Since the current change (during non-winning) is completed, all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed ("1"-"1"-"5"). Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is stopped and displayed in a non-winning manner (for example, white display color).

  In FIG. 92 (C): The next fluctuation is started. This coast mode ends when the special symbol changes 100 times without obtaining a winning result. When the coast mode ends, the normal mode with a low probability non-time reduction state is entered. If a winning result is obtained in the coast mode, a reach effect is executed and a big hit is achieved.

  FIGS. 93 to 101 are continuous diagrams showing examples of effects when a power-off state occurs during a game. Specifically, FIG. 93 and FIG. 94 are generated during the special symbol variation display, FIG. 95 is generated during the special symbol outage stop display, and FIG. 96 is the special symbol big hit stop display. 97 occurs during the opening in the jackpot game, FIGS. 98 and 99 occur during the round in the jackpot game, and FIGS. 100 and 101 show during the interval between rounds in the jackpot game. FIG. 102 shows an example of an effect when it occurs during the ending in the big hit game, and FIG. 103 shows an example of the effect when it occurs when in the variation start waiting state (customer waiting state).

[Special symbol change display]
FIG. 93 (A): For example, during the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display effect is executed within the screen. Specifically, as described in FIG. 74 (F) during the variable display, the battle reach effect is executed, and the effect that the female character turns the drum toward the panda character is executed.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 93: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears. In addition, in a state where the power-off state continues, nothing is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and no power is supplied to the launch control board 108 that controls the launch of the game ball. It will be impossible to launch.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 93: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state has been resolved and the supply of power has been resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control.

  In the example shown in the figure, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while. Note that the image corresponding to the return waiting state may be an image such as a color bar depending on the specifications of the gaming machine.

[Resume state] [Change display resumed]
In FIG. 94 (D): When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the special symbol variation display, the game is resumed from the middle of the special symbol variation display. When transitioning to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect are executed on the display screen.

Here, the return effect is an effect indicating that the return operation is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, character information “Please wait for a while. Image is being restored” is displayed.
In addition, the launch suggestion effect is an effect that suggests that a game ball is launched during execution of the return effect. In the example shown in the figure, in addition to the character information of “right strike”, the launch in the right direction is suggested. A triangular arrow is displayed.

  After that, the variable display proceeds smoothly, and when the special symbol variable display ends because the set variable time has elapsed, the stop display is started. When the stop display is started, the command output from the main control CPU 72 is received by the effect control device 124. Specifically, a command indicating that special symbol stop display is started (special symbol stop designation command), a command related to a special symbol stop display (special symbol 2 symbol confirmation designation command), a model code designation command Will be received. Therefore, the effect control device 124 will execute a stop display effect related to the stop display in the liquid crystal display 42 based on the received command. Since the model code designation command is also received at the same time, a stop display effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is executed. Therefore, the return effect ends before the stop display effect starts.

[Stop display start (when disconnected)]
94 (E): When the stop display of the second special symbol is started, the return effect indicating the returning state is ended, and the stop display effect of the effect symbol is started. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the combination of effect symbols is displayed in a state where the combination is stopped at the gap of “6”-“3”-“4”. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.

  Here, before the power was cut off, the combination of the production symbols during the variable display production was a reach state of “2”-“being varied”-“2”, whereas the combination of the production symbols this time was “6”. -"3"-"4" state. This is because the information of the variable display effect is deleted because the reset processing is performed in the effect control device 124, and the stop point of the stop display effect cannot be determined (set) based on the information of the variable display effect. This is because the gap is selectively determined.

  Of the commands output from the main control CPU 72 when the power is turned on and received by the effect control device 124, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 from the command related to the special symbol operation memory. Markers M1 and M2 representing the number of working memories for each symbol are displayed again.

  In addition, since the current gaming state is confirmed from the received model code designation command, the background image in the screen corresponds to the fireworks rush mode that represents the “high probability time shortened state (electric support support state & high probability state)” The background image of the fireworks rush to be displayed will be displayed.

[Next fluctuation start]
94 (F): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses (when the stop display ends), the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started. For example, the column of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled in the vertical direction (for example, from the top to the bottom) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of the change of the second special symbol. Then, the variable display effect is started.

[Stop display start (at big hit)]
94 (G): On the other hand, when the second special symbol stop display is started in the same manner, the return effect indicating the returning state is ended, and the stop display effect of the effect symbol is started. The If the result of this internal lottery is winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning (16-round probability variation 3) mode, the production symbol is similarly stopped and displayed in the winning (16-round probability variation 3) mode. Production is performed (production execution means). That is, in the illustrated example, the combination of effect symbols is displayed in a state where it stops at the big hit of “7”-“7”-“7”. Also, the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, red display color) corresponding to the winning (16-round probability variation 3).

  Here, before the power is cut off, the combination of the effect symbols in the variable display effect is “2”-“changed”-“2”, whereas the combination of the effect symbols of this time is “7”. -"7"-"7" state. This is based on the special symbol 2 symbol confirmation designation command received by the production control device 124, that is, based on the winning type (winning symbol) at the time of winning the second special symbol, the effect symbol displayed during the stop display effect. This is because the combination is determined, and if there is no power interruption, the case where there is a promotion effect (for example, FIG. 76) during the variable display is shown.

  The markers M1 and M2 representing the background image and the number of working memories are also displayed again as before the power interruption.

  In FIG. 94 (H): When the stop display time of the second special symbol elapses (when the stop display ends), the big hit game is started. For example, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. Then, when the big hit game progresses, the big role production with the contents corresponding to the progress situation is executed (for example, FIG. 77).

  Here, in the conventional gaming machine, since the model code designation command was not sent at the time of stop display, the correct stop display effect cannot be executed, and the stop display is performed with the return effect. At the time of loss, it was returned with the fluctuation display effect of the next fluctuation, and it was not known whether or not the fluctuation before the power interruption was completed. However, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs during the special symbol variation display and returns, information including the model code designation command is sent from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at the start of the special symbol stop display. Since it is sent, the production symbol returns on the screen in a state representing a loss or a big hit. Therefore, the player can be clearly informed that the variable display effect that was being executed before the power was turned off has ended.

[Special symbol stopped display (when disconnected)]
FIG. 95 (A): For example, during the stop display of the second special symbol, the stop display effect is executed in the screen. Specifically, during the stop display, as described in FIG. 94 (E), the combination of effect symbols is displayed in a state of being stopped at the gap of “6”-“3”-“4”.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 95: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 95: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state is resolved and the supply of power is resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Returning status] [Stop display restart]
When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the special symbol stop display, the game is resumed from the middle of the special symbol stop display. When the state changes to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen (for example, (D) in FIG. 94), but the special symbol stop display is short. Since it ends in (for example, about 0.5 seconds), it is not necessary to execute the return effect.

  Thereafter, when the stop display at the time of disconnection is completed in a short time, the command output from the port by the main control CPU 72 is received by the effect control device 124. Specifically, a command related to a symbol at the time of a special symbol stop display (special symbol 2 symbol confirmation designation command), a model code designation command, a short time number designation command, an ST number designation command, and a special number designation command are received. Become. Therefore, the effect control device 124 represents that an image when the stop display effect ends is displayed on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the received command. Since the model code designation command is also received at the same time, an image of the stop display effect at the end corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is displayed.

[Stop display start (when disconnected)]
95 (D): When the stop display of the second special symbol is ended, the stop display effect of the effect symbol is also ended, and an image at the end of the stop display effect is displayed. If the result of this internal lottery is non-winning and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a non-winning (missed) manner, the staging display effect is also performed in a non-winning (missing) manner. (Direction execution means). That is, in the example shown in the figure, the combination of effect symbols is displayed in a state of being stopped at the gap of “5”-“2”-“6”. Further, the fourth symbol Z2 is also stopped and displayed in a mode (for example, white display color) corresponding to the deviation.

  Here, before the power is cut off, the combination of the effect symbols during the stop display effect is “6”-“3”-“4”, whereas the combination of the effect symbols this time is “5”-“ 2 ”-“ 6 ”. This is because the gap is selectively determined again in the effect control device 124.

  Of the commands output from the main control CPU 72 when the power is turned on and received by the effect control device 124, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are displayed at the bottom of the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 from the command related to the special symbol operation memory. Markers M1 and M2 representing the number of working memories for each symbol are displayed again.

  In addition, since the current gaming state is confirmed from the received model code designation command, the background image in the screen corresponds to the fireworks rush mode that represents the “high probability time shortened state (electric support support state & high probability state)” The background image of the fireworks rush to be displayed will be displayed.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 95 (E): Since the stop display of the second special symbol is completed, the start condition of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is satisfied. Here, since there are working memories corresponding to the second special symbol in this state (a total of four), the oldest working memory is consumed and the next second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Be started. For example, the column of the left effect symbol, the middle effect symbol, and the right effect symbol is scrolled in the vertical direction (for example, from the top to the bottom) on the screen of the liquid crystal display 42 substantially in synchronization with the start of the change of the second special symbol. Then, the variable display effect is started.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the power-off state occurs during the stop display when the special symbol is off and returns, the model code is designated from the main controller 70 to the effect control device 124 at the end of the special symbol stop display. Since the information including the command is sent, the production symbol returns on the screen in a state of representing a loss. Therefore, the player can be clearly informed that the stop display effect that was being executed before the power was turned off has ended.

[Stop display (Big hit)]
96 (A): For example, during the stop display of the second special symbol, the stop display effect is executed in the screen. Specifically, as described in FIG. 94 (G) during the stop display, the stop state corresponding to the winning combination (16 round probability variation 3) of the combination of the production symbols “7”-“7”-“7”. Is displayed.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 96: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 96: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state has been resolved and the supply of power has been resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Returning status] [Stop display restart]
When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the special symbol stop display, the game is resumed from the middle of the special symbol stop display. When the state changes to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen (for example, (D) in FIG. 94), but the special symbol stop display is short. Since it ends in (for example, about 0.5 seconds), it is not necessary to execute the return effect.

  Thereafter, when the stop display at the time of the big hit is completed in a short time, the opening of the big hit is started at the same time, and when the opening is started, the command output by the main control CPU 72 is received by the effect control device 124. Specifically, a model code designation command, a command relating to a special symbol stop display (special symbol 2 symbol confirmation designation command), and an opening designation command are received. Therefore, the effect control device 124 will execute the opening effect at the time of the big hit on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the received command. Since the model code designation command is also received at the same time, an opening effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is executed.

[Start of big hit (opening)]
In FIG. 96 (D): The stop display of the second special symbol is finished, and the big hit opening effect is started. The result of the internal lottery this time is winning, and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the winning (16-round probability variation 3) mode, so the big hit corresponding to the winning type is started and the opening effect is executed. The In the illustrated example, character information such as “special festival bonus” is displayed, and it can be instructed to the player that the special festival bonus will be started.

[First round starts]
In FIG. 96 (E): Thereafter, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, for example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds of “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. Then, when the big hit game progresses, the big role production with the contents corresponding to the progress situation is executed (for example, FIG. 77).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs during the stop display at the time of the special symbol big hit, the main control device at the start of the big hit game (may be at the end of the special symbol stop display) Since the information including the model code designation command is sent from 70 to the effect control device 124, the opening effect of the big hit game is returned on the screen. Therefore, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the big hit game has been started after the stop display effect at the big hit that was being executed before the power was cut off.

[During jackpot game opening]
97 (A): For example, the first special symbol is won (10 round probability variation symbol), and the opening effect is executed in the screen during the opening of the big hit game (battle bonus) corresponding to the winning type. In the illustrated example, character information such as “Battle Bonus Start!” Is displayed, and the player can be instructed that the battle bonus will be started. In addition to the “right-handed” character information, a triangular arrow suggesting a rightward launch is displayed in the screen. Thus, the player can be informed that the game method that has been left-handed so far has been changed to right-handed.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 97: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 97: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state is resolved and the supply of power is resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Returning state] [Opening restart]
In FIG. 97 (D): When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the opening of the big hit game, the game is resumed from the middle of the opening. When transitioning to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen.

  Thereafter, when the opening time of the big hit game ends, the round game (first round) is started. At the start of the round, the effect control device 124 receives a command output from the main control CPU 72 at the port. Specifically, a model code designation command, a command related to a special symbol stop display (Special Figure 1 design confirmation designation command), a special winning opening release designation command, and a round number command are received. Therefore, the production control device 124 will execute the first big-game production on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the received command. Therefore, the return effect ends when the first round of the prominent effect starts.

[First round starts]
In FIG. 97, (E): When the opening of the big hit game is completed, the first round of the big hit game is started. For example, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND1” is displayed on the screen. Then, when the big hit game progresses, the big role production with the contents corresponding to the progress situation is executed (for example, FIG. 77).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs during the opening of the big hit game and returns, the main controller 70 includes the model code designation command from the main control device 70 at the start of the first round of the big hit game. Since the information is sent, on the screen, at the start of the first round of the jackpot game, it returns with the performance corresponding to the model. Therefore, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the big hit game that was being executed before the power was turned off has been successfully resumed from the first round. In addition, since an effect suggesting a right strike is executed during the restoration of the image, the player can be informed that the big hit game is progressing even during the restoration of the image.

[5th round]
FIG. 98 (A): For example, the first special symbol is won (10-round probability change), and the fifth round of the big hit game (battle bonus) corresponding to the winning type is executed. In the example shown in the figure, an effect corresponding to the fifth round of the protagonist effect is performed, and the ghost of the umbrella gives out a special technique that pops out a long tongue from the mouth, and the female character greets the special technique with a fan. Has been done. If the ghost of the umbrella wins in this state, it means that it was a big hit with “10 round normal symbol”, and if the female character wins, “10 round probability variable symbol”, “16 round probability variable symbol 1, 2” It means that one of them was a big hit.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 98: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 98: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state has been resolved and the supply of power has been resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Resume state] [Restarting round 5]
In FIG. 99 (D): When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the execution of the fifth round of the big hit game, the game is resumed from the middle of the fifth round. When transitioning to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined number of game balls enter the big prize opening during the return effect and the launch suggestion effect, the fifth round of the big hit game is ended. At the end of the fifth round, the effect control device 124 receives a command output from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a model code designation command, a command related to a special symbol stop display (Special Fig. 1 symbol confirmation designation command), a special winning opening closing designation command, and a round number command are received. Therefore, based on the received command, the effect control device 124 executes an effect at the end of the fifth-round prolific effect (effect during the interval) on the liquid crystal display 42. Therefore, the return effect ends before the big-game effect starts.

[End of round 5] [Start of interval]
(E) in FIG. 99: When the fifth round in the big hit game is finished, a big-game effect (interval effect) corresponding to the end of the fifth round is executed. And the interval time provided until the 6th round is started will be started. Here, the display of character information such as “ROUND5” indicates that the fifth round has ended.

[Start of 6th round (when 10th round wins regular symbol)]
(F) in FIG. 99: Thereafter, when the interval time ends and the sixth round is started, the sixth-round big-acting effect corresponding to the winning type (winning symbol) at the time of the big hit is executed. In addition, the winning type (winning symbol) at the time of the big hit is confirmed from the command received by the effect control device 124 at the end of the fifth round or at the start of the sixth round, specifically, the special symbol 1 symbol confirmation designation command. be able to. In the example shown in the figure, in the case of winning with 10 rounds of normal symbols, a defeat effect is executed in the 6th round. Specifically, an umbrella ghost is displayed with a letter “defeat ...”, and a female character is displayed smaller (a teammate character defeat production). Thereafter, as shown in (F) and thereafter in FIG. 64, the big-game effect corresponding to the progress status is executed.

[Start of round 6 (when winning with other symbols)]
In FIG. 99 (G): On the other hand, in the case of winning with either “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, the victory effect is executed in the sixth round. Specifically, the female character is displayed larger with the letters “Victory !!”, and the ghost of the umbrella is displayed smaller (Allied character victory effect). Thereafter, as shown in (I) and thereafter in FIG. 65, the big role production corresponding to the progress status is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs during the big hit game and returns, information including the model code designation command from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 at the end of the round of the big hit game. Will be returned on the screen at the end of the round of the big hit game with the production corresponding to the model. Therefore, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the jackpot game that was being executed before the power supply was successfully resumed from that round. In addition, since an effect suggesting a right strike is executed at the time of return, the player can be informed that the big hit game is in progress.

[In the interval after 10 rounds]
In FIG. 100 (A): For example, the first special symbol is won (10-round probability variation symbol, 16-round probability variation 1 or 16-round probability variation 2), and the jackpot game (battle bonus) corresponding to the winning type (winning symbol) ) Until the 10th round ends and the 11th round starts. In the example shown in the figure, a treasure challenge effect is executed. Specifically, an effect in which a horse character pulls a treasure is executed, and if a treasure is successfully attracted, six substantial jackpot rounds are added. There is an effect during the interval in which more prize balls can be acquired and if it fails, the prize balls cannot be acquired. Whether or not the winning ball can be obtained (whether or not 6 rounds are added) is determined in advance according to the winning type, and an effect such as success or failure is already set at the start of the interval. ing.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 100: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 100: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state has been resolved and the supply of power has been resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Returning status] [Interval restart]
In FIG. 101 (D): When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the execution of the interval after 10 rounds in the big hit game, the game is resumed from the middle of the interval. When transitioning to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen.

  Thereafter, when the interval between the 10th and 11th rounds proceeds smoothly and the set interval time elapses, the 11th round is started. At the start of the eleventh round, the effect control device 124 receives a command output from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a model code designation command, a command related to a special symbol stop display (Special Figure 1 design confirmation designation command), a special winning opening release designation command, and a round number command are received. Therefore, based on the received command, the production control device 124 will respond to the game machine (model) on the liquid crystal display 42, and the 11th round of big-game production corresponding to the type of winning game (winning type) from now on. Will be executed. Therefore, the return effect ends when the eleventh round, the prolific effect starts.

[Starting ending (when winning 10th round probable symbol)] or [Starting 11th round (when winning 16th probable symbol 1)]
In FIG. 101 (E): When the interval after 10 rounds of the jackpot game is over, if the winning type (winning symbol) is a jackpot game corresponding to the 10-round probability variable symbol, the ending is started and the winning type (winning symbol) is In the case of a jackpot game corresponding to the 16-round probability variable symbol 1, the 11th round will be started. For example, a character “failure” is displayed at the top of the screen, and an effect is produced in which the hermit character utters the line “sorry”. Such failure production is executed by using a part of the end time in the case of winning with “10th round probability variation symbol”, and from the 11th round in the case of winning with “16th round probability variation symbol 1”. It is executed using the fast opening time up to the 16th round. In addition, in the 11th to 16th rounds when winning with “16 round probability variation 1”, the second variable winning device 31 is opened 4 times, but the opening time is set extremely short, so The profit by is hardly obtained. Then, at the timing when the ending progresses and the big hit game is finished, the big role ending effect that teaches the internal state to be transferred thereafter is executed (for example, (c) in FIG. 71).

[The 11th round starts (when the 16th round probability variation 2 wins)]
In FIG. 101 (F): On the other hand, if the winning type (winning symbol) is a jackpot game corresponding to the 16-round probability variable symbol 2, the eleventh round will be started. Specifically, character information corresponding to the number of rounds “ROUND11” is displayed on the screen. Then, when the big hit game progresses, the big role production with the contents corresponding to the progress situation is executed (for example, FIG. 70). Here, since the power interruption occurred during the interval, the treasure challenge effect during the interval is not executed until the end, for example, the effect that the character information such as “success” shown in FIG. 69 (V) is displayed is not executed. The eleventh round is started, but the effect ((V) in FIG. 69) may be executed in the eleventh round. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 70 and subsequent figures, the big role production corresponding to the progress status is executed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when a power-off state occurs during the big hit game interval and returns, the main controller 70 includes a model code designation command from the main control device 70 at the start of the round after the big hit game interval. Since the information is sent, on the screen, at the start of the big hit game round, it will return with the production corresponding to the model. Therefore, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the jackpot game that was being executed before the power supply was successfully resumed from that round. In addition, since an effect suggesting a right strike is executed at the time of return, the player can be informed that the big hit game is in progress.

[During jackpot game ending]
In FIG. 102 (A): For example, the first special symbol is won (10 round normal symbol), and the opening effect is executed in the screen during the ending of the big hit game (battle bonus) corresponding to the winning type. In the illustrated example, character information such as “entering the coast mode” is displayed, and the player can be instructed to shift to the “low probability time shortened state” coast mode as a privilege after the big hit game.

[Power failure occurred]
(B) in FIG. 102: Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
(C) in FIG. 102: Here, it is assumed that the power-off state is resolved and the supply of power is resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

[Returning state] [Ending restart]
In FIG. 102 (D): When the return waiting state ends, the pachinko machine 1 shifts to the returning state this time. In this case, since the power interruption occurred during the ending of the big hit game, the game is resumed from the middle of the ending. When transitioning to the returning state, a return effect and a launch suggestion effect (right-hand suggestion effect) are executed on the display screen.

  Thereafter, when the ending time of the big hit game ends, the command main control CPU 72 regarding the gaming state after the big hit game ends outputs a port and receives it in the effect control device 124. Specifically, after the major role game state change designation command, model code designation command, special symbol stop command display (special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation command), short time number designation command, ST number designation command, special number of times The specified command will be received. In addition, after the completion of the main character, a command related to the launch position is also received. If there is a special symbol working memory, a command for starting the next fluctuation is received. A command related to (waiting state) is received. Therefore, the effect control device 124 executes the effect in the liquid crystal display 42 based on these received commands.

[Next fluctuation start]
In FIG. 102 (E): In this example, when the ending of the jackpot game is completed, since the working memory related to the special symbol exists, the next variation is started in the coast mode (low probability time shortened state). In addition, in order to receive the information including the model code designation command at the end of the ending (at the end of the big hit game), character information such as “entering the coast mode!” Shown in FIG. Since the command accompanying the start of the next change is received, the effect shown may be executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs and returns after the big hit game ending, the main control device 70 sends information including the model code designation command to the effect control device 124 after the big hit game ending. Therefore, on the screen, at the end of the big hit game, it will return with the production corresponding to the model. Therefore, it is possible to clearly tell the player that the big hit game that was being executed before the power-off was completed successfully and that a new game was started.

[Waiting for change start (waiting for customers)] [During demonstration]
In FIG. 103 (A): For example, since a predetermined time has not been confirmed in the change start waiting state (customer waiting state), a demonstration effect is being executed. In the example shown in the figure, the state that the character of the eagle on the plane is surprised that the female character on the Pegasus appeared. For example, a demonstration effect corresponding to the model may be executed.

[Power failure occurred]
In FIG. 103 (B): Here, it is assumed that there is a problem with the power supply system and a power-off state has occurred. In this case, since power is not supplied to the liquid crystal display 42, the display on the liquid crystal screen disappears.

[Power-on (waiting for return)]
In FIG. 103 (C): Here, it is assumed that the power-off state is resolved and the supply of power is resumed. In this case, the main controller 70 shifts to a return waiting state. On the other hand, the VDP 152 of the effect control device 124 displays an image corresponding to the return waiting state under its own control. For example, a status bar indicating the time until the return waiting state ends is displayed together with the character information “Please wait for a while.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses after the command output by the main control CPU 72 at the time of power recovery is received by the effect control device 124, the main control device 70 sets the current game state to a special symbol change start waiting state (customer Whether it is in a waiting state). In this case, since it is in a special symbol change start waiting state (customer waiting state), a command representing the state is output to the port by the main control CPU 72 and received by the output control device 124. Specifically, a customer waiting designation command and a model code designation command are received. Therefore, the effect control device 124 starts the effect indicating the fluctuation start waiting state (customer waiting state) on the liquid crystal display 42 based on the received command. Since the model code designation command is also received at the same time, an effect corresponding to the model of the gaming machine is executed.

[Restart waiting for change start (waiting for customers)]
In FIG. 103 (D): In this example, when the variation start waiting state (customer waiting state) is resumed, the effect returns with the effect symbol stopped in the combination at the time of detachment. Thereafter, when a predetermined time elapses, a demonstration effect ((A) in FIG. 103) is executed.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the power-off state occurs and returns during the fluctuation start waiting state (customer waiting state), information including the model code designation command from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124 when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the screen, when returning, it will return with an effect corresponding to the model.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, since the model code designation command is added and transmitted at every timing when the command is transmitted from the main control device 70 to the effect control device 124, the effect control device 124 stores unintended information due to noise. Even if a change occurs, it is always possible to confirm which model the gaming machine is compatible with, and it is possible to always execute a correct performance corresponding to that model. In addition, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the model as soon as possible after the power-off state occurs.

  Next, an example of a control method for specifically realizing the above effects will be described. For the above-described variable display effect, reach effect, pre-reach effect, memory number display effect, active role effect, button effect (player participation type effect), maxim sound effect, power interruption effect, etc. Controlled through processing.

[Production control processing]
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect control process executed by the effect control CPU 126. This effect control process is executed, for example, in a timer interrupt process (interrupt management process) separately from a reset start (main) process (not shown). The effect control CPU 126 generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined interrupt cycle (for example, a period of several tens of μs to several ms) during execution of the reset start process, and executes the timer interrupt process.

  The production control processing includes production management processing during power-off preparation (step S400a), command reception processing (step S400), production management processing during power-off recovery (step S400b), production design management processing (step S402), and after normal symbol hit Subroutine of effect management process (step S404), display output process (step S405), lamp drive process (step S406), sound drive process (step S408), effect random number update process (step S410), and other processes (step S412) It is the structure containing a group. Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect control process will be described along each process.

  Step S400a: In the effect management process during power-off preparation, the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) executes the effect during power-off preparation. The power-off preparation effect is an effect executed by the control of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) when the power is turned on. Specifically, the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) executes processing for displaying the effect pattern. The production management process during power-off preparation may be executed in a reset start process (not shown). In addition, once the power-off preparation preparation effect management process is executed, it is a process that is not executed (skip) until the next power-on.

  Step S400: In the command receiving process, the effect control CPU 126 receives an effect command transmitted from the main control CPU 72. The effect control CPU 126 analyzes the received commands and stores them in the command buffer area of the RAM 130 according to type. The command for the effect transmitted from the main control CPU 72 includes, for example, a special figure destination determination effect command, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number increases, a (special symbol) effect command when the operating memory number decreases, a start port Winning sound control command, demonstration effect command, lottery result command, variation pattern command, variation start command, stop symbol command, symbol stop command, state designation command, round number command, error notification command, jackpot end effect command, number cut There are a counter value command, a change pattern destination determination command, a stop display time end command, a model code designation command, and the like.

  In this process, when a model code designation command is received, the model information of the gaming machine is confirmed. Also, based on this confirmation result, an effect corresponding to the model information of the gaming machine is selected. For example, if the grand prize opening is closed in a given round and the power is restored before the grand prize opening is closed on a model that has a promotion effect in the next round, the promotion effect could not be displayed in the past. Since the model code designation command is received at the start of the round, the promotion effect can be executed. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine equipped with a different round presentation for each model, the model code designation command is received at the start of the round or at the end of the round even when the power is restored during the opening or round. The correct round production corresponding to can be executed at an early stage.

  Step S400b: In the effect management process during power-off recovery, the effect control CPU 126 controls the content of the effect during power-off recovery (return effect execution means). In this process, the content of the above-described launch suggestion effect ((G) in FIG. 46) is controlled. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S401: In the operation memory effect management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the execution of the above-described stored number display effect and the pre-reading notice effect using the markers M1 and M2. The contents of the working memory effect management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S402: In the effect symbol management process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the variable display effect and the stop display effect using the effect symbol based on the result of the internal lottery, or the first variable winning device 30 or the second variable prize. The content of the effect at the time of the opening / closing operation | movement of the apparatus 31 is controlled (effect execution means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects effect patterns of various notice effects (notice effect before reach occurrence, notice effect after reach, etc.). The contents of the effect symbol management process will be further described later with reference to another drawing.

  Step S404: In the display output process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) with basic control information of the effect contents (for example, the number of working memories of each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol). , An operation memory effect pattern number, a prefetch notice effect pattern number, a change effect pattern number, a change notice effect number, a background pattern number, etc.). Thereby, the effect display control device 144 (the display control CPU 146 and the VDP 152) controls the display operation by the liquid crystal display 42 based on the instructed effect content (effect executing means).

  Step S406: In the lamp driving process, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the lamp driving circuit 132. In response to this, the lamp driving circuit 132 drives (turns on or off, blinks, changes in luminance gradation, etc.) the various lamps 46 to 52 and the panel lamp 53 based on the control signal.

  Step S408: In the next sound drive process, the effect control CPU 126 sends the effect contents (for example, BGM, sound data, etc. during the variable display effect, during the reach effect, during the mode transition effect, during the jackpot effect) to the sound drive circuit 134. Instruct. Thereby, the sound according to the production content is output from the speakers 54, 55, and 56.

  Step S410: In the effect random number update process, the effect control CPU 126 updates various effect random numbers in the counter area of the RAM 130. The effect random number includes, for example, a random number used for selecting a notice and a random number used for a normal background change lottery (effect lottery).

  Step S412: In other processing, for example, the effect control CPU 126 outputs a control signal to the driving IC of the movable body 40f. The movable body 40f operates using the movable body motor 57 as a drive source, and produces an effect in synchronism with the display of an image by the liquid crystal display 42 or independently.

  Through the above-described effect control process, the effect control CPU 126 can comprehensively control the effect contents in the pachinko machine 1.

[Direction management processing during power-off recovery]
FIG. 105 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the procedure of the effect management process during power-off recovery. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S460: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a state in which power supply is being restored. This confirmation can be confirmed by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and checking whether a power-on command is stored. When the power-on command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, the effect control CPU 126 can determine that the internal state is a state in which power-off is being restored. When a power-on command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130, a command for restoring an effect image thereafter (for example, a variation pattern command, a variation start command, a symbol stop command, a round number command, a game state command, etc. Etc.), the power-on command is maintained without being erased.

  As a result, when it is confirmed that the internal state is a state where the power supply is being restored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes S462. On the other hand, when it is not possible to confirm that the internal state is a state where the power supply is being restored (No), the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 104).

  Step S462: The effect control CPU 126 loads a launch position designation command. The launch position designation command is stored in the command buffer area of the RAM 130.

Step S464: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (whether or not it indicates that a game ball should be fired in the second game area).
As a result, when it is confirmed that the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S466. On the other hand, when it cannot be confirmed that the content of the launch position designation command indicates right-handed (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S468.

  Step S466: The effect control CPU 126 executes a power-off return effect selection process including a right-hand suggestion effect (launching suggestion effect execution means, launch position designation effect execution means). Specifically, a process of selecting an effect pattern shown in (D) in FIG. 94 is executed.

Step S468: The effect control CPU 126 executes a power-off recovery effect selection process that does not include a right-hand suggestion effect. Specifically, processing for selecting character information such as “right-handed” for the effect shown in (D) of FIG. 94 and an effect pattern without an arrow indicating the right direction is executed.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 104).

[Working memory production management process]
FIG. 106 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the working memory effect management process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S700: First, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time of increasing the number of working memories has been received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130, and confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories increases is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S702. When it is not possible to confirm that the production command when the number of working memories increases is saved (step S700: No), the production control CPU 126 does not execute step S702.

  Step S702: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect selection process when the number of working memories increases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect for displaying the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

  Step S704: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the effect command at the time when the number of working memories decreases is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored. When it is confirmed that the production command when the number of working memories decreases is saved (step S704: Yes), the production control CPU 126 executes step S706. If it is not possible to confirm that the effect command when the number of working memories is reduced is stored (step S704: No), the effect control CPU 126 does not execute step S706.

Step S706: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect selection processing when the number of working memories decreases. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect of sliding the markers M1 and M2 corresponding to the first special symbol and the second special symbol and an effect of erasing the marker corresponding to the lottery element consumed by the internal lottery.
When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process (FIG. 104).

[Direction design management processing]
FIG. 107 is a flowchart illustrating an exemplary procedure of the effect symbol management process. The effect symbol management process includes an execution selection process (step S500), an effect symbol change pre-process (step S502), an effect symbol change process (step S504), an effect symbol stop display process (step S506), and a variable winning device operation. This is a configuration including a subroutine group of processing (step S508). Hereinafter, the basic flow of the effect symbol management process will be described along each process.

  Step S500: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S502 to S508). For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the effect symbol management process in the “jump table” as the return address. Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variation display effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation pre-processing (step S502) as the next jump destination. On the other hand, if the effect symbol variation pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the effect symbol variation processing (step S504) as the next jump destination, and if the effect symbol variation in-process has been completed, As a jump destination, the effect symbol stop display in-progress process (step S506) is selected. The variable winning device operating process (step S508) is selected when the main winning control variable winning device management process (step S5000) is selected in the main control CPU 72 or the small winning variable variable winning device management process (step S6000) is selected. Is selected as the jump destination. In this case, steps S502 to S506 are not executed.

  Step S502: In the effect symbol variation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 performs an operation of preparing conditions for starting the variable display effect using the effect symbol. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the reach effect according to various conditions (lottery result, winning type, variation pattern, etc.), or the effect pattern for the notice effect (the reach other than the pre-reading notice effect pattern). Pre-occurrence notice pattern, reach occurrence notice pattern, etc.). In addition, the production control CPU 126 also performs demonstration production control when the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state. The specific processing content will be described later using another flowchart.

  Step S504: In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 during execution of the variable display effect using the effect symbol, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and an effect corresponding to the result is displayed. The control information on the contents (button effect) is instructed to the display control CPU 146.

  Step S506: In the effect symbol stop display processing, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the stop display effect using the effect symbols and moving images in a manner corresponding to the result of the internal lottery. That is, the effect control CPU 126 instructs the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) to end the variable display effect and execute the stop display effect. In response to this, the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) ends the variable display effect that has been actually executed in the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and executes the stop display effect. Thereby, the stop display effect is executed substantially in synchronization with the stop display of the special symbol, and the result of the internal lottery can be effectively taught (disclosure, notification, notification, etc.) to the player (design effect execution). means). However, in the present embodiment, at the time of a small hit, the stop display effect is executed in a manner similar to or approximated to a loss.

  Step S508: In the variable winning device operation process, the effect control CPU 126 controls the contents of the effect during the small hit or the big hit. In this processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the contents of the prominent effect according to various conditions (for example, winning type). For example, in the case of 10 rounds of big hit, the production control CPU 126 selects a big role production pattern of 10 rounds of big win as the production contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42, and instructs this to the production display control device 144 (display control CPU 146). To do. As a result, the image of the prominent effect is displayed on the display screen of the liquid crystal display 42, and the effect contents change as the round progresses.

[Preliminary design change processing]
FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the effect symbol variation pre-processing. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S600: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a demonstration effect command is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the command for demonstration effect is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S602.

  Step S602: The effect control CPU 126 executes a demo selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects a demonstration effect pattern. The demonstration effect pattern defines the contents of the effect indicating that the pachinko machine 1 is in a so-called customer waiting state.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the last address of the effect symbol management process. Then, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect control process as it is, and controls the contents of the demonstration effect based on the demonstration effect pattern in the subsequent display output process (step S404 in FIG. 104) and lamp driving process (step S406 in FIG. 104). To do.

  On the other hand, if it is confirmed in step S600 that the demonstration effect command is not stored (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S604.

  Step S604: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is out of place (non-winning). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not a lottery result command at the time of non-winning is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is saved (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S612. On the other hand, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of non-winning is not saved (No), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S606. Note that whether or not the current variation is off can be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command in addition to the lottery result command. In other words, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the outlier normal variation or outlier reach variation, it can be determined that the current variation is outlier. Alternatively, if the current stop symbol command specifies a non-winning symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is out of sync.

  Step S606: If the lottery result command is other than non-winning (missing) (step S604: No), the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the current fluctuation is a big hit. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 accesses the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirms whether or not the lottery result command at the time of the big hit is stored. As a result, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is stored (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610. On the contrary, when it is confirmed that the lottery result command at the time of big hit is not stored (No), since only the lottery result command at the time of small hit is left, in this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S608. Whether or not the current variation is a big hit can also be confirmed based on a variation pattern command or a stop symbol command. That is, if the current variation pattern command corresponds to the big hit variation, it can be determined that the current variation is a big hit. If the current stop symbol command corresponds to the jackpot symbol, it can be determined that the current variation is a jackpot.

  Step S608: The effect control CPU 126 executes a small hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72 (for example, “C0H00H” to “D0H7FH”). The effect pattern number is prepared in advance corresponding to the variation pattern command, and the effect control CPU 126 can select an effect pattern number corresponding to the variation pattern command at that time by referring to an effect pattern selection table (not shown). it can. The production pattern numbers may be prepared in pairs with the variation pattern commands, or a plurality of production pattern numbers may be prepared for one variation pattern command.

  When the effect pattern number is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), changes the effect schedule (change time, reach type, and reach occurrence timing) corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time, and stops. The display mode and the like are determined. Note that the types of effect symbols determined here correspond to the “combination of symbols at the time of a small hit”.

  The above procedure corresponds to the case of “small hit”, but in the case of hitting the big hit, the effect control CPU 126 confirms that it is “big hit” in step S606 (Yes). In this case, the effect control CPU 126 executes step S610.

  Step S610: The effect control CPU 126 executes a big hit hour fluctuation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command (for example, “E0H00H” to “F0H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. In the big hit time effect pattern selection processing, the processing may be further branched for each big hit time stop symbol. The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  In the case of non-winning, the following procedure is executed. In other words, when the effect control CPU 126 confirms that there is a shift in step S604 (Yes), it next executes step S612.

  Step S612: The effect control CPU 126 executes a deviation effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at the time of deviation based on the variation pattern command (for example, “A0H00H” to “A6H7FH”) received from the main control CPU 72. The effect pattern numbers at the time of losing are classified into “ordinary deviation fluctuation”, “short-time deviation fluctuation”, “outlier reach fluctuation”, and the like, and a fine reach fluctuation pattern is defined in “outlier reach fluctuation”. Note that which effect pattern number is selected by the effect control CPU 126 is determined by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control CPU 72.

  When the effect pattern number at the time of detachment is selected, the effect control CPU 126 refers to an effect table (not shown), and the effect symbol change schedule corresponding to the change effect pattern number at that time (change time, presence / absence of reach, occurrence of reach) , Reach type and reach occurrence timing) and stop display mode (for example, “7”-“2”-“4”, etc.). The specific processing content will be further described later using another flowchart.

  When any one of the above steps S608, S610, and S612 is executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S614.

  Step S614: The effect control CPU 126 executes a notice selection process (notice effect executing means). In this process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the content of the notice effect to be executed during the current variable display effect by lottery. The content of the notice effect is determined based on, for example, the result of internal lottery (winning or non-winning) and the current internal state (normal state, high probability state, time reduction state). As described above, the notice effect is for notifying the player of the possibility that the reach state will occur during the variable display effect, or for notifying that there is a possibility that it will eventually be a big hit. Therefore, the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be low at the time of non-winning, but the selection ratio of the notice effect is set to be relatively high to increase the player's expectation at the time of winning.

  Step S616: The effect control CPU 126 executes a mode effect management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a background image corresponding to the stay mode. For example, when the stay mode is “normal mode (low probability non-time shortened state)”, the production control CPU 126 selects a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 61B) where the female character is sitting on the chaise longue. Execute the process. In addition, when the stay mode is “fireworks rush (high probability time shortened state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 72A) with fireworks as a motif. Run. Furthermore, when the stay mode is “coast mode (low probability time shortening state)”, the effect control CPU 126 performs a process of selecting a background image (for example, the background image shown in FIG. 92A) having the coast as a motif. Run.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol management process (end address). As a result, in the subsequent effect symbol variation processing (step S504 in FIG. 107), the variation display effect and the stop display effect are executed based on the actually selected variation effect pattern (effect execution means), and various A notice effect is executed based on the notice effect pattern. In addition, various stay mode effects are executed based on the background (stay) mode pattern selected here (effect execution means).

[Big hit variation pattern selection process]
FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a procedure example of the big hit hour variation effect pattern selection process. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S800: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command. The internal state can also be confirmed by a variation pattern command (the same applies hereinafter).

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S804. If the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S802. Run.

  Step S802: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S806, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S808. Run.

  Step S804: The effect control CPU 126 executes a fireworks rush big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 and the like is executed. If the variation pattern command is a command corresponding to a super reach effect, the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to the super reach effect (specific reach effect execution means), and the change pattern command is a reach other than the super reach effect. In the case of a command corresponding to an effect (normal reach effect or long reach effect), the effect control CPU 126 selects an effect pattern corresponding to a reach effect other than the super reach effect (the same applies hereinafter).

  Step S806: The effect control CPU 126 executes a coast mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a reach effect is executed in the coast mode, and a process of selecting an effect that is a big hit is executed.

  Step S808: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal mode big hit effect pattern selection process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of winning shown in FIG. 62 and the like is executed.

  Then, when the process of step S804, step S806, or step S808 ends, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 108).

[Variation production pattern selection process during loss]
FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the above-described variation effect pattern selection processing at the time of loss. Hereinafter, it demonstrates along the example of a procedure.

  Step S850: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a high probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the high probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S854, and if the internal state is not the high probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S852. Run.

  Step S852: The effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the internal state is a low probability time shortening state. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 can confirm the internal state by accessing the command buffer area of the RAM 130 and confirming the state designation command.

  As a result, if the internal state is the low probability time shortening state (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 executes step S856. If the internal state is not the low probability time shortening state (No), the effect control CPU 126 performs step S858. Run.

  Step S854: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing at the time of fireworks rush failure. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIGS. 73 to 76 is executed.

  Step S856: The effect control CPU 126 executes an effect pattern selection process when the coast mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 92 or the like is executed.

  Step S858: The effect control CPU 126 executes effect pattern selection processing when the normal mode is off. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 determines the effect pattern number at that time based on the variation pattern command received from the main control CPU 72. Specifically, a process of selecting an effect at the time of failure shown in FIG. 61 and the like is executed.

  And after finishing the process of step S854, step S856, or step S858, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the effect symbol variation pre-process (FIG. 108).

[Processing when the variable winning device is activated]
FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a configuration example of processing when the variable winning device is activated. The variable winning device operating process is a subroutine of execution selection processing (step S752), variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754), variable winning device operating processing (step S756), and variable winning device operation post-processing (step S758). This is a configuration including a (program module) group. Here, first, the basic flow of the variable winning device operating process will be described along each process.

  Step S752: In the execution selection process, the effect control CPU 126 selects the jump destination of the process to be executed next (any one of steps S754 to S758) from the “jump table”. For example, the effect control CPU 126 sets the program address of the process to be executed next as the jump destination address, and sets the end of the variable winning device operating process as the return destination address in the stack pointer.

  Which process is selected as the next jump destination depends on the progress of the processes performed so far. For example, if the situation has not yet started the variable winning device operation pre-processing, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation pre-processing (step S754) as the next jump destination. Further, if the variable winning device operating pre-processing has already been completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operating process (step S756) as the next jump destination. Furthermore, if the process during operation of the variable winning device is completed, the effect control CPU 126 selects the variable winning device operation post-process (step S758) as the next jump destination.

  Step S754: In the variable winning device pre-operation process, the effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the contents of the effect to be executed during the big hit game or the small hit game. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S756: In the variable winning device operating process, the effect control CPU 126 generates control information instructing the effect display control device 144 (display control CPU 146) as necessary. For example, when performing an effect using the effect switching button 45 (a treasure challenge effect) during the execution of the jackpot effect, the effect control CPU 126 monitors whether or not the player has operated the effect button, and the effect contents according to the result. The control information of (button effect) is instruct | indicated with respect to display control CPU146. In addition, when any kind of special special festival bonus effect is executed among the big-acting effects, processing for selecting an effect corresponding to the type is performed. Details of the specific process (special special festival bonus production management process) will be described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S758: In the post-operation of the variable prize apparatus, the effect control CPU 126 executes an effect of transmitting the transition destination mode to the player during the end time of the variable prize device. For example, in the case of winning with “10-round probability variation symbol” and “16-round probability variation symbol 1 to 3”, the effect control CPU 126 produces an effect (indicated by (Z) in FIG. 70) indicating that the fireworks rush is entered. In the case of winning with “10 round normal symbol”, a process of selecting an effect (effect shown in FIG. 64 (G), etc.) indicating the entry into the coast mode is executed. Run.

  Also, in this process, if the effect control CPU 126 is elected with “16 round probability variation 3” and the first and second special special festival bonus effects are being executed as the prominent effect, the fireworks rush is displayed. During the effect indicating entry, the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is set to OFF (non-actuated), and the effect of releasing the game ball stored in the collection passage 31c is executed (for example, FIG. 81). Middle (L), (L) in FIG. 80). In addition, if the third special special festival bonus effect is executed, the power interruption notice effect and the recovery effect (after this jackpot game is finished (after the fireworks rush entry effect), the game balls stored in the collection passage 31c during this time) And a process of forcibly setting the door opening / closing effects (FIGS. 89 to 91) until the special symbol variation display at the time of winning is completed.

[Pre-processing of variable winning device operation]
FIG. 112 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of pre-operation of the variable winning device. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S900: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the stop symbol command. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms the type of stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponding to the stop symbol command received in the previous process (command reception process: step S400). In addition, “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variation symbol”, and “16 round probability variation symbol 1 to 3” are defined as the types of stop symbol (winning symbol), and it is confirmed which one is among them Is done. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S902.

  Step S902: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900) is “16 round probability variation symbol 3”. As a result of the confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “16 round probability variation symbol 3” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S906. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “16 round probability variable symbol 3” (No), that is, the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round normal symbol”, “10 round probability variable symbol”, Or, when it is “16 round probability variation symbol 1, 2”, production control CPU126 next executes step S904.

  Step S904: The effect control CPU 126 executes a normal jackpot effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S906: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special jackpot effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process (FIG. 111).

[Normal jackpot effect setting processing]
FIG. 113 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of the normal big hit effect setting process. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S910: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900: FIG. 112) is “10 round normal symbol”. As a result of this confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round normal symbol” (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S914. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “10 round normal symbol” (No), that is, the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1”. If “2”, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S912.

  Step S912: The effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) confirmed in the previous process (Step S900: FIG. 112) is “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1”. To check. As a result of the confirmation, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is “10 round probability variation symbol” or “16 round probability variation symbol 1” (Yes), the presentation control CPU 126 next executes step S916. On the other hand, when the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) is not “10 round probability variable symbol” or “16 round probability variable symbol 1” (No), that is, the type of stop symbol (winning symbol) is “16 round probability variable symbol”. If “2”, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S918.

  Step S914: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the first battle bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the first battle bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 107). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the first battle bonus effect executed in the case of winning in “10 round normal symbol” is an effect in which the teammate character loses to the enemy character in the battle effect (FIGS. 63 and 64).

  Step S916: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the second battle bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the second battle bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 107). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the second battle bonus effect executed when winning with the “10-round probability variation symbol” or “16-round probability variation symbol 1” is the treasure challenge effect when the teammate character wins the enemy character in the battle effect. The effect that fails is executed at (FIGS. 63, 65 to 68, 71).

  Step S918: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the third battle bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the third battle bonus effect stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 107). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the 3rd Battle Bonus Production executed when winning with “16 Round Probability Pattern 2” is a special round with a production where the ally character wins the enemy character in the battle production and succeeds in the treasure challenge production. An effect is executed (FIGS. 63 and 65 to 70).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable prize device pre-operation process (FIG. 112).

[Special jackpot production setting process]
FIG. 114 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of special jackpot effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S930: The effect control CPU 126 confirms the on-hold lottery result. Specifically, information related to the special figure destination determination effect command received and stored in the previous command reception process (step S400) is read from the command buffer area of the RAM 130, the stored internal lottery result, and the winning For the time, check the type of stop symbol (winning symbol). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S932.

  Step S932: The production control CPU 126 confirms in the previous process (Step S930), the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, and the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) becomes “16 round probability variation 3”. Check if the corresponding item is stored. As a result of the confirmation, if the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning and the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) corresponds to “16 round probability variation 3” is stored (Yes), the production control CPU 126 Next executes step S934. On the other hand, when the result of the internal lottery corresponds to winning, or the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) does not correspond to “16 round probability variation 3” (No), that is, the internal lottery If the result corresponds to non-winning, or if the type of the stop symbol (winning symbol) other than “16 round probability variation 3” is stored at the time of winning, the presentation control CPU 126 next performs step S936. Run.

  In this process, the next process is determined depending on whether or not it is “16 round probability variation 3”, but depending on whether it is “16 round probability variation 2” or “16 round probability variation 3”. The next process may be determined. Furthermore, the next process is determined depending on whether the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning, without limiting to whether the result of the internal lottery corresponds to the winning and “16 round probability variation 3”. In other words, it may be determined based on whether or not there is a change to win in the hold.

  Step S934: The effect control CPU 126 executes a special special festival bonus effect setting process. The specific processing content will be further described later with reference to another flowchart.

  Step S936: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting a normal special festival bonus effect. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 provides various effect pattern numbers corresponding to the normal special festival bonus effects stored in advance in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Read image data. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 107). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto. For example, the normal special festival bonus performance that is executed when the current win is “16 round probability variation 3” and there is no “16 round probability variation 3” in the stored working memory. Then, an image related to the festival such as “fan” and “drum” is displayed around the screen, and an effect is executed (FIG. 77).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable prize device pre-operation process (FIG. 112).

[Special special festival bonus production setting process]
FIG. 115 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of special special festival bonus effect setting processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example.

  Step S950: The effect control CPU 126 acquires a special special festival bonus effect random number. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 acquires the special special festival bonus effect random number updated in the previous process (effect random number update process: step S410). The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S952.

  Step S952: The effect control CPU 126 refers to the special special festival bonus effect selection table. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 refers to a special special festival bonus effect selection table stored in the ROM 130.

[Special Special Festival Bonus Production Selection Table]
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing an example of the special special festival bonus effect selection table. The effect control CPU 126 refers to the special special festival bonus effect selection table shown in FIG. 116 and determines the type of the special special festival bonus effect when the type of the big role effect (big hit effect) corresponds to the special special festival bonus effect. decide.

  In the special special festival bonus production selection table, the left column shows the distribution value for each special special festival bonus production, and each distribution value “50”, “30”, “20” is set to 100. Corresponds to the ratio of cases. Also, in the second column from the left, “Special Special Festival Bonus Production”, “Second Special Special Festival Bonus Production”, “Third Special Special” of special special festival bonus production contents corresponding to each distribution value. "Festival bonus production" is shown. That is, when the type of effect during the current big role is a special special festival bonus effect, the ratio at which “first special special festival bonus effect” is selected is 50/100 (= 50%). The ratio of selecting “Special Special Festival Bonus Direction” is 30/100 (= 30%), and the ratio of selecting “Third Special Special Festival Bonus Direction” is 20/100 (= 20%). . Note that the types of special special festival bonus effects are not limited to these three types, and more types may be defined.

[See Figure 115: Special Special Festival Bonus Production Setting Process]
With reference to the special special festival bonus effect selection table, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S954.

  Step S954: The effect control CPU 126 draws a special special festival bonus effect. Specifically, the production control CPU 126 determines the type of special special festival bonus production based on the special special festival bonus production random number and the special special festival bonus production selection table acquired and referred to in the previous processing (step S950 and step S952). Select. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S956.

  Step S956: The effect control CPU 126 executes a process of selecting the special special festival bonus effect drawn in the previous process (step S954). Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 produces an effect pattern corresponding to the selected special special festival bonus effect previously stored in the image ROM 154 of the effect display control device 144 (VDP 152) as the effect contents to be displayed on the liquid crystal display 42. Various image data related to the number is read out. It should be noted that an effect based on the read various image data is executed in the effect symbol changing process (step S504 in FIG. 107). Specifically, when the big hit game is started, the read effect is executed. The Rukoto.

  For example, the first special special festival bonus that is executed when the current winning is “16 round probability variation 3” and there is a “16 round probability variation 3” in the stored working memory. As for the effect, the effect of successfully storing a predetermined number of the game balls is performed (FIGS. 78 to 81). Further, in the second special special festival bonus effect, an effect that is successful in storing the game ball by pressing the effect switch button 45 is executed (FIGS. 78, 83 to 80). In addition, in the third special special festival bonus effect, the normal special festival bonus effect is executed up to the 15th round, and the effect of storing game balls is executed in the final 16th round (FIGS. 87 and 88).

  When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the special jackpot effect setting process (FIG. 114).

[Direction management process during variable winning system operation]
FIG. 117 is a flowchart illustrating a procedure example of special special festival bonus effect management processing. Hereinafter, the contents will be described along a procedure example. This process is one of the processes included in the variable winning device operating process, and is particularly a process executed when the special special festival bonus effect is executed in the variable winning device operating process.

  Step S980: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the current big hit game round is any one of the 11th to 16th rounds. As a result of the confirmation, if the current big hit game round is any one of the 11th to 16th rounds (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S982. On the other hand, when the current big hit game round is not any of the 11th to 16th rounds (No), that is, when the current big hit game round is any of the 1st to 10th rounds, the presentation control CPU 126 Step S994 is executed.

  Step S982: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the first special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed. As a result of the confirmation, if the first special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S986. On the other hand, when the first special special festival bonus effect is not currently executed (No), that is, when the second special special festival bonus effect or the third special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed, the effect control CPU 126. Next executes step S984.

  Step S984: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the second special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed. As a result of the confirmation, if the second special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S988. On the other hand, if the second special special festival bonus effect is not currently being executed (No), that is, if the third special special festival bonus effect is currently being executed, the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S990.

  Step S986: The effect control CPU 126 executes a stored game ball management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 counts the number of game balls staying in the collection passage 31c after entering (winning) in the second grand prize opening. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 is based on the signals from the second count switch 85 provided at the entrance of the second prize winning opening and the effect switch 85e provided in the storage device 31t, and in the collection passage 31c. Count the number of game balls staying at.

  Also, the effect control CPU 126 can change the effect performed during the big hit game based on the counted number of game balls. For example, when the number of game balls currently staying in the collection passage 31c is 0, the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is turned on (operated) to increase the number, or the number of game balls When the number is 17, the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t can be turned off (non-actuated) in order to reduce the number. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S990.

  Step S988: The effect control CPU 126 executes button effect management processing. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 displays an image simulating the effect switch button 45 during the round, and whether or not the game ball can be stored in the collection passage 31c by pressing the effect switch button 45. Make settings related to production. Specifically, the effective time of the effect switching button 45 is set, the result of pressing the effect switching button 45 is selected to be successful or unsuccessful, and the storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t is set when successful. The storage device solenoid 31s of the storage device 31t can be turned off (non-operational) when failure occurs. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S990.

  Step S990: The effect control CPU 126 checks whether or not the operating condition of the storage device solenoid 31s is satisfied. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 confirms whether or not the operating condition of the storage device solenoid 31s is satisfied based on the type of special special festival bonus effect currently being performed and the progress of the effect. .

  For example, when the first special special festival bonus effect is executed, the effect control CPU 126 is based on the result of the previous stored game management process (step S986) (the number of game balls staying in the collection passage 31c). Confirms whether the operating condition of the storage device solenoid 31s is satisfied. When the second special special festival bonus effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 126 stores the storage device based on the result of the previous button effect management process (step S988) (whether or not the result of pressing the effect switch button 45 is successful). It is confirmed whether or not the operating condition of the solenoid 31s is satisfied. When the third special special festival bonus effect is being executed, the effect control CPU 126 determines whether or not the current round number has reached a predetermined number of rounds (for example, the final 16th round). It is confirmed whether or not the operation condition of 31s is satisfied.

  As a result of the confirmation, when the operation condition of the storage device solenoid 31s is satisfied (Yes), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S992. On the other hand, when the operating condition of the storage device solenoid 31s is not satisfied (No), the effect control CPU 126 next executes step S994.

  Step S992: The effect control CPU 126 executes a storage device solenoid management process. In this process, the effect control CPU 126 generates a drive signal for operating the storage device solenoid 31s in the storage device 31t. The generated drive signal is applied to the storage device solenoid 31s via the panel electrical board 138, and the storage device solenoid 31 is driven. As a result, the opening / closing member 31j passes through the passage 31g in the storage device 31t. The game ball is stored in the collection passage 31c. On the other hand, when this process is not executed, the drive signal is not applied to the storage device solenoid 31s, and the storage device solenoid 31s is not driven. Therefore, the opening / closing member 31j does not close the passage 31g in the storage device 31t, and the game ball is not collected. It will pass without being stored in 31c. The effect control CPU 126 next executes step S994.

  Step S994: The effect control CPU 126 executes other effect processes. Specifically, the effect control CPU 126 changes the number of stored game balls displayed on the screen in the special special festival bonus effect, or enters the storage device 31t through the collection passage 31c. For example, an effect corresponding to various effects is selected, such as turning on the LED lamp 40l as if it passed through the middle start winning opening 26. When the above procedure is completed, the effect control CPU 126 returns to the variable winning device operating process.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the game ball that has entered the second grand prize opening to pass through the collection passage that is visible to the player for a long time, ) Is satisfied, the storage device provided at the end point of the collection passage is operated, the game balls released from the collection passage are dammed up, and the game balls can be temporarily stayed in the collection passage. Thereby, since the range of the production | presentation in a big hit game is expanded, the fall of the interest with respect to a game can be suppressed. In addition, by notifying the reserving chain in the game ball that entered the second big prize opening during the big hit game, it is possible to give the player the impression of being added to the single hit ball, The player can have a sense of expectation for the next time.

  The images given in other production examples are merely examples, and these can be appropriately modified. Further, the structure, board surface configuration, specific numerical values and the like of the pachinko machine 1 are preferable examples including those shown in the drawings, and it goes without saying that these can be appropriately modified.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 8 Game board unit 8a Game area 20 Start gate 28 Variable start winning device 33 Normal symbol display device 33a Normal symbol operation | movement memory lamp 34 1st special symbol display device 35 2nd special symbol display device 34a 1st special symbol operation memory Lamp 35a Second special symbol operation memory lamp 38 Game state display device 42 Liquid crystal display 45 Effect switching button 70 Main control device 72 Main control CPU
74 ROM
76 RAM
124 Production control device 126 Production control CPU

Claims (5)

A main control device for controlling the progress of the game based on the predetermined progress of the game;
An effect control device that controls the effect content based on notification of information from the main control device,
When a progress trigger that causes a change in the progress of the game on the control by the main control device occurs, trigger information generating means for generating trigger information regarding the progress trigger generated as information to be notified to the effect control device;
Model information generating means for generating model information indicating which model of the plurality of models with different contents of the game corresponds to the main control device;
A game machine comprising: information transmission means for adding the model information to the opportunity information and notifying the effect control means when the progress opportunity occurs on the control by the main control device. In the game according to claim 1,
Power control means connected to an external power supply to supply drive power;
Progress information related to the progress of the game currently being performed, and the progress information that retains the stored progress information even when a power-off state occurs in which the supply of drive power by the power control means is cut off Holding means;
When the supply of driving power by the power control means is resumed and the power-off state is resolved, a return operation is executed to return the progress of the game based on the progress information stored in the progress information holding means. Game content return means,
When new information is provided by the information transmission unit after the return operation by the game content return unit is provided in the effect control device, the progress trigger based on the trigger information among the notified information A game further comprising: an effect execution means after power interruption return that executes an effect corresponding to a model corresponding to the main control device based on the model information among the notified information. Machine. The gaming machine according to claim 2,
Provided in the effect control device, further comprising a return effect executing means for executing a return effect indicating that the return operation is being executed during the execution of the return action by the game content return means;
The execution execution means after the power interruption is restored,
When new information is notified by the information transmitting means during execution of the return effect by the return effect executing means, the return effect is terminated, and based on the trigger information among the notified information. A game machine that produces an effect corresponding to the model corresponding to the main control device based on the model information among the notified information, which is an effect corresponding to the progress opportunity. In the gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
A plurality of effect data provided in the effect control device and corresponding to a model to which the main control device corresponds with respect to the effect content controlled by the effect control device, and corresponding to each of the predetermined triggers Production data storage means for storing at least
The production control means includes
When the effect data storage means stores effect data corresponding to a model different from the model supported by the main control device, the effect data corresponding to the model information notified from the main control device is A gaming machine that reads out the plurality of effect data stored by the effect data storage means and controls the effect contents. In the game according to any one of claims 1 to 4,
Lottery execution means for executing a predetermined lottery when a lottery opportunity occurs during the game;
When the predetermined lottery is executed, the symbol display means for stopping and displaying the symbol in a manner representing the lottery result of the predetermined lottery after the symbol is variably displayed over a predetermined fluctuation time triggered by this,
When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning manner by the symbol display means, special game executing means for opening a special winning opening and executing a special game;
Round game execution means for configuring the special game executed by the special game execution means by a round game executed over a plurality of rounds, and opening the big prize opening in a predetermined release pattern during each round game And further comprising
The information transmitting means includes
At the start of the symbol variation display by the symbol display means, at the start of the symbol stop display by the symbol display means, at the end of the symbol stop display by the symbol display means, the special game execution means by the special game execution means At the start of game execution, at the end of execution of the special game by the special game execution means, at the start of execution of the round game by the round game execution means, or at the end of execution of the round game by the round game execution means A gaming machine that adds the model information to the opportunity information and notifies the effect control means when a progress opportunity has occurred.